2010 Chevrolet Cobalt Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
the name COBALT are registered trademarks of
General Motors.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle either because they
are options that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase documentation relating
to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features
found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25895310 C Third Printing
©2010 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this
happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.
WARNING:
{
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gauge
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1 In Brief
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Portable Audio Devices (Auxiliary Input or
USB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑16.
K. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
L. Horn on page 4‑3.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
C. Cruise Control on page 4‑6 (If Equipped).
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑38.
M. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9
(If Equipped). Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 5‑6 (If Equipped).
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑19.
N. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑13.
E. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84
(If Equipped).
O. Shift Lever (Manual Shown). See Manual
Transmission Operation on page 3‑28 and
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3‑26.
F. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
G. Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
P. Climate Control System on page 4‑14.
Q. Heated Seats on page 2‑4 (If Equipped).
R. Glove Box on page 3‑39.
H. Audio System(s) on page 4‑52.
I. Fog Lamps on page 4‑10 (If Equipped).
J. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Drive Information
Press Q to lock all doors.
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press and hold V for approximately one second to
open the trunk.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Press L and release to locate the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound
the panic alarm.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away
from the vehicle.
Press L again to cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
Press K to unlock the
driver door. Press again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining
doors.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press Q.
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the climate control system
may come on.
Power Door Locks
This vehicle may have
power door locks.
The controls are located
on the driver and front
passenger door armrests.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start
can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
K : Press to unlock the doors.
Q : Press to lock the doors.
For more information see:
.
Turn the ignition on and then back off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑6.
.
Door Locks on page 3‑8.
Door Locks
To lock the driver door from outside the vehicle, turn the
key clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to unlock.
.
Power Door Locks on page 3‑9.
.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3‑4
.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also
be used to lock or unlock the doors.
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each
door or use the power door locks.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Release
Press the front of the switch to open the window and
pull the switch up to close it.
In addition to the trunk release button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the trunk can be
opened from inside the vehicle by pressing the remote
trunk release button. This button is located inside the
driver storage compartment, on the left side of the
instrument panel.
See Power Windows on page 3‑15.
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
See Trunk on page 3‑12.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Windows
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Power Windows
For vehicles with power
windows, the switches
on the driver door armrest
control each window.
The switch on each
passenger door controls
only that doors window.
Try to move the seat to be sure it is locked in place.
See Manual Seats on page 2‑2.
Sedan Shown, Coupe
Similar
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Height Adjuster
Reclining Seatbacks
To raise or lower the driver seat, move the lever upward
or downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired
height.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
See Seat Height Adjuster on page 2‑3.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑4.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If equipped, the lumbar
knob is located on
This vehicle may have
heated front seats.
The switches are located
on the instrument panel
above the climate control
system.
the front of the driver
seat lower cushion.
Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to
increase or decrease
the lumbar support.
Driver's Switch shown
See Manual Lumbar on page 2‑3.
Press the side of the switch with the double indicator
lights to turn the seat to the highest setting.
Press the side of the switch with the single indicator
light to turn the seat to the lowest setting.
Return the switch to the center to turn off the
heated seat.
See Heated Seats on page 2‑4.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
See Head Restraints on page 2‑7.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags and roof‐rail airbags are
not affected by this.
If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system, the
passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
United States
Canada
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑10.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑15.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo Engine)
on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing System (With
Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for important information.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑24.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑41
.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door
armrest.
Interior Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind the vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps from behind.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use. See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 3‑37
.
1. Use the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to choose either the left or right outside
mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamp
The vehicle may have a dome lamp.
Move the lever near the dome lamp to the following
positions:
9: Turns the lamp off, even when a door is opened.
1: Turns the lamp on whenever a door is opened.
+: Turns the dome lamp on.
Mirror Reading Lamp
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Press the button near each lamp to turn the
reading lamps on and off.
For more information on interior lighting, see:
The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
.
Entry/Exit Lighting on page 4‑11.
.
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in
place.
See Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P: When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the
switch to Off/On will turn the Automatic Headlamp
System off or back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the automatic transmission must be in P (Park) or the
manual transmission must have the park brake set,
before the Automatic Headlamp System can be
turned off.
Exterior Lighting
For more information, see:
.
Headlamps on page 4‑9.
.
Fog Lamps on page 4‑10.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑10.
.
Headlamps on Reminder on page 4‑10.
.
The lever is on the left side of the steering column.
Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 4‑10.
2: Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps.
;: Turns on the parking lamps and taillamps only.
AUTO: Automatically turns on the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) during daytime, and the headlamps,
parking lamps, and taillamps at night.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer: Press the button at the end of the
lever until the washers begin.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
Climate Controls
The vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be
controlled with this system.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
9: Turns the wipers off.
&: Turn this band for intermittent or speed sensitive
operation. As vehicle speed increases or decreases, the
wiper interval also increases or decreases.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown, without Air
Conditioning similar
x: Delays wiping cycle. Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes.
A. Air Delivery Mode
Control
D. Air Conditioning
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Recirculation
6: Slow wipes.
1: Fast wipes.
B. Fan Control
8: Use for a single wiping cycle.
C. Temperature Control
See Climate Control System on page 4‑14.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 : Press 4 to display additional text information related
to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,
WMA song. Song title information will be displayed on
the top line of the display while the artist information
will be displayed on the bottom line, it the information
is available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.
When information is not available, “No Info” displays.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Radio(s) on page 4‑55.
Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
For radios with a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations
can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to
six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown
O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
For radios without a FAV button, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed
on the six numbered buttons.
BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
f : Select radio stations.
For more information, see Radio(s) on page 4‑55.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Clock
Satellite Radio
To set the time and date for the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB port or the Radio with CD (MP3) player:
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN.
2. Press O to turn the radio on.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
3. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
4. Press the softkey located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
.
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) on
5. Increase or decrease the time or date by
page 4‑55
.
turning f clockwise or counterclockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
page 4‑53
.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Portable Audio Devices
Steering Wheel Controls
(Auxiliary Input or USB Port)
If equipped, some audio
controls can be adjusted
using the controls on the
right side of the steering
wheel.
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack and
a USB port, located on the audio faceplate. External
devices such as iPods®, laptop computers, MP3
players, CD changers, USB storage devices, etc. can
be connected to the auxiliary input jack using a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable or the USB port depending on the audio
system.
Press the CD/AUX button to play audio from the
portable player.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” and “Using the
USB Port” under Radio(s) on page 4‑55.
e + / e − : Increases or decreases volume.
w / x : Press to change radio stations, select tracks
on a CD, or to select tracks and navigate folders on an
iPod® or USB device.
b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press
again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than
two seconds to interact with the OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems.
c : Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4‑84.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bluetooth®
Cruise Control
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left
side of the steering wheel.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used
in the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4‑73.
J: On/Off.
RES+: Press to resume or accelerate speed.
SET−: Press to set or decrease speed.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Outlets
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The Electronic Stability Control system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console, rearward of the shift lever.
.
To turn off both traction control and Electronic
To use the accessory power outlet, remove the cover.
Stability Control, press and hold d until
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑12 and
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑13
(If Equipped).
F illuminates and the appropriate DIC message
displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40
.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
Performance and Maintenance
For more information, see Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5‑6.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The traction control system limits wheel spin.
The system turns on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
.
To turn off traction control, press and release d on
the instrument panel. F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message displays. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on
traction control.
For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5‑9.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
The Tire Pressure
Monitor alerts you when
a significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire
maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑67 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑68.
If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label located on
the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑25. The warning light will remain on
until the tire pressure is corrected.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. The kit can be used to
seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6‑84 for
complete operating information.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil Life System
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset to 100% only
following an oil change.
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
.
When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
2. Press the DIC information and reset buttons at the
same time to enter the personalization menu.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
3. Press the information button until the DIC display
shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑21.
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
OnStar®
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program.
This program provides technically trained advisors
who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year,
minor repair information or towing arrangements.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services
are available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
X : Push this button for hands‐free, voice‐activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)
or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84
for more information.
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual
advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the
vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location
so they can provide services where it is located.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2 Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-60
Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Passenger Sensing System (With Turbo
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . 2-72
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of the
driver seat lower cushion
on the inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the lumbar support.
The driver's seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is at
the desired height.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have heated front seats. The switches
are located on the instrument panel above the climate
control system.
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING:
{
Press the side of the
switch with the double
indicator lights to turn on
the heated seat at the
highest setting.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
WARNING:
{
Driver's Switch Shown,
Passenger's Switch
Similar
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Both indicator lights will be lit to indicate that the setting
is on high. Press the side of the switch with the single
indicator light to go to the low setting. The indicator light
will be lit to indicate that the setting is on low. Return
the switch to the center to turn off the heated seat.
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seats.
If your vehicle has been turned off, the last heated
seat setting will be retained when the vehicle is
started again.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press the
button, located on the top
of the seatback, and push
the restraint down.
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the easy entry seat, do the following:
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe)
WARNING:
{
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you have used
it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat
to be sure it is locked.
WARNING:
{
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1. Push down the easy entry seat handle located on
the rear of the seatback on the outboard side to
release the seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback forward completely while pushing
the seat forward.
The front passenger seat can be used to easily get in
and out of the rear seat.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Move the seat rearward until it locks into place
after someone gets into the rear seat area.
To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:
4. Move the seatback to its original position and
make sure the seatback is locked.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
You can fold either side of the rear seatback down for
more cargo space.
1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the small
handles located in the center of the trunk.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2. Push the seatback open through the trunk, or pull it
down from inside the vehicle.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and push rearward
until you hear a click. Push and pull on the seatback to
be sure it is locked into place.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use safety
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do
with safety belts.
WARNING:
{
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
pull forward on the top of the seatback at the area
of the latch to be sure it is locked.
WARNING:
{
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt
cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or
your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts,
the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from
the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
WARNING:
{
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑20
for additional information.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑31 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑34. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap‐shoulder belt properly.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system, if equipped.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for
more information.
1. If the seat has a safety belt guide, and the safety
belt is not routed through the guide, slide the edge
of the belt webbing through the opening on the
guide. Be sure the belt is not twisted.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
Extender on page 2‑30
.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly if necessary.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
(Sedan Only)
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Press the release
button (A) and move
the height adjuster to
the desired position.
The adjuster can be
moved up by pushing
up on the shoulder belt
guide.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
After the height adjuster is set to the desired position,
try to move it down without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into position.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑75.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. If not, they are available through your dealer/
retailer. The guides may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for some adults. When installed and properly
adjusted, the comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so the safety belt can be removed
from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its
storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
.
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑24 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
WARNING:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross
the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in
a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
{
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑24.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
WARNING:
{
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: (Continued)
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
(Continued)
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
WARNING:
{
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING:
{
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑41 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for
additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
(Continued)
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH
system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether always
to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and
that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for your child restraint.
Top Tether Anchor
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has two exposed metal lower
anchors in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel. Open the cover to access
the anchor. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑39 for additional information.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
WARNING:
{
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
WARNING:
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
WARNING:
{
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose
the anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
2.3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head
restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑41 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑41 for top
tether anchor locations.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑39
.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
necessary.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑41 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If your seat has a safety belt guide, return the safety
belt into the guide on the seatback by sliding the
webbing through the opening on the guide.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
WARNING: (Continued)
The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint .
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator for more information on this, including
important safety information.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for
additional information.
(Continued)
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) for how and
where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a
child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) for top tether anchor locations.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
5. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
3. If the seat has a safety belt guide, remove the
safety belt from the guide on the head restraint by
sliding the webbing through the opening on the
guide. Do not secure the child restraint with the
safety belt routed through the guide.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
7. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger sensing
system, and the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System (Without
Turbo Engine) on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for more
information.
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
If the seat has a safety belt guide, insert the safety belt
into the guide on the head restraint by sliding the
webbing through the opening on the guide.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
WARNING:
{
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
WARNING:
{
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑58
.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
WARNING:
{
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑31 or Infants and Young Children on
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21 for
more information.
page 2‑34
.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger's airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger's side.
The driver's frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest. However, they are
only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment
occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
Your vehicle may have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag
System on page 2‑53. Roof-rail airbags are intended
to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system's designed threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle design.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does not
deform.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A roof-rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined
by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail
airbags, deployment is determined by the location
and severity of the side impact.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's
upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑58 for more information.
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
WARNING:
{
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot
for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑59.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior
lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
WARNING:
{
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑18 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑18
.
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
Passenger Sensing System
(Without Turbo Engine)
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. If equipped, the passenger
airbag status indicator is visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
page 4‑22
.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof‐rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
United States
Canada
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
WARNING:
{
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a child restraint.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑22.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
The passenger sensing system is designed turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑50.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
WARNING:
{
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for more information, including important safety
information.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
page 2‑7
.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not
turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint
depending upon the child's seating posture and
body build. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
.
The passenger sensing system may turn off the
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the
seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit,
and the airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel will also be lit.
.
Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked
in may make it more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn on) the passenger
airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is on
the seat. If the passenger airbag is turned on, the
on indicator will be lit.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat
immediately. If the airbag readiness light is lit, do
not install a child restraint or allow anyone to occupy
the seat. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for important safety information.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
WARNING:
{
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
United States
Canada
Passenger Sensing System
(With Turbo Engine)
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. If equipped, the passenger
airbag status indicator is visible on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or
the word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑22.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof‐rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
WARNING:
{
child restraints.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for more information, including important safety
information.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑22.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger's seat.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
page 2‑7
.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑50.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing the vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 8‑16
.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
WARNING:
{
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
WARNING:
{
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System (Without Turbo Engine) on page 2‑62 or
Passenger Sensing System (With Turbo Engine) on
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
page 2‑67
.
If you have any questions, call Customer
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
position, which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger's seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑21 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑59. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder
light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They
can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑20 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑118
.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
WARNING:
{
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21
.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See
your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Manual Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) . . . 3-32
Shifting Out of Park (Automatic
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . . 3-34
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Outside Manual Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Outside Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7
.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
With Remote Start Shown,
service.
Without Remote Start
Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑6.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior
lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
approximately one second to open the trunk. The trunk
will open using the transmitter when the vehicle speed
is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) if the vehicle has a manual
transmission, when the ignition is off, or when the
vehicle shift lever is in P (Park) if the vehicle has an
automatic transmission.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the remote lock feedback can be programmed to have
the horn chirp and/or the turn signals flash to confirm
locking. See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑46.
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑16.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press to locate
the vehicle. The horn sounds three times and the
headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door. If K is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
unlock. The interior lamps turn on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback can be
programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the turn
signals flash to confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK
HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑46.
Press and hold L for more that two seconds to sound
the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps
and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press L again to
cancel the panic alarm.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter
is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
The high‐beam headlamps and parking lamps may turn
on when K is pressed. See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑46.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft‐deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3‑16
.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Remote Vehicle Start
page 4‑40
.
Your vehicle may have a remote start feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine from
outside the vehicle. It may also start the vehicle's
heating or air conditioning systems. When you start
your vehicle using the remote start feature, the climate
control system will come on and adjust the interior to
the temperature settings that you left it set to when
you turned the vehicle off.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After your vehicle's engine has been started two times
using the remote vehicle start button, the vehicle's
ignition switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then
back to LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
Positions on page 3‑21 for information regarding
the ignition positions on your vehicle.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is running, to extend the time by 10 minutes for the
engine to continue to run.
After entering the vehicle after a remote start, insert and
turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle's
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following. The parking lamps will turn off to indicate the
engine is off.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4 for additional
information.
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN and then
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, do
the following:
LOCK/OFF.
Your vehicle's engine can be started two times, per
ignition cycle, using the transmitter's remote start
feature.
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release Q , then immediately press and
hold / until the vehicle's turn signal lamps flash.
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first
10 minutes will immediately expire and the second
10 minute time frame will start.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will
turn on and remain on while the engine is running.
The vehicle's doors will be locked.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
Doors and Locks
.
The remote start system is disabled through
Door Locks
the DIC.
.
The vehicle's key is in the ignition.
WARNING:
.
{
The vehicle's hood is open.
.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑27.
.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will
not open it. The chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors
are not locked. So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly and the doors
should be locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
.
The oil pressure is low.
.
Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided for that ignition cycle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑46 for additional
information.
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
(Continued)
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
WARNING: (Continued)
This vehicle may have
power door locks.
The controls are located
on the driver and front
passenger door armrest.
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To lock the driver's door from the outside, turn
the key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
Driver Switch shown
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter,
if equipped, to lock and unlock the doors.
Press K to unlock the doors.
Press Q to lock the doors.
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each
door or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock
all doors.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Locking
Automatic Door Lock
If your vehicle has power locks, it will have the
delayed locking feature.
On vehicles with power door locks, the doors
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out
of (P) Park for a vehicle with an automatic transmission.
For a vehicle with a manual transmission, the speed
must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors
for up to five seconds when the power door lock switch
or remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock
the vehicle.
The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door is
closed, all of the doors will lock and the turn signal
lamps will flash. To cancel the delay and lock the doors
immediately, press the lock button a second time.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
If your vehicle has power locks, it has a programmable
automatic door unlock feature.
The doors can be programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to automatically unlock several
ways. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑46
for more information.
This feature will not lock the doors if the key is in
the ignition.
You can disable this function through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑46.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan)
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. You must open the
rear doors to access
them. The label showing
lock and unlock positions
is located near the lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have this
feature. If you press the power door lock switch when
the key is in the ignition and any door is open, all
the doors will lock and the driver's door will unlock.
Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when
locking your vehicle.
Security Lock Label shown
To set the locks, do the following:
The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing
and holding the power door lock in the lock position for
three seconds.
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk
WARNING: (Continued)
To release the trunk lid from the outside, use the key or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
if equipped.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate,
or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
WARNING:
{
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
(Continued)
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from
inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk release
button. It is located inside
the driver storage
compartment on the
lower left side of the
instrument panel.
On a manual transmission equipped vehicle, the
remote trunk release works when the ignition is either
off or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or the vehicle speed is
less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
On an automatic transmission equipped vehicle,
the remote trunk release works when the shifter is
in P (Park).
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the inside of the trunk lid of the
vehicle. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle and push the trunk lid
open from the inside to open the trunk.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has power
windows, the switches on
the driver's door armrest
control each of the
Manual Windows
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
windows.
Power Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Sedan Shown, Coupe
Similar
In addition, each passenger's door has a window switch
that controls that door's window. Press the front of the
switch to open the window. Pull the front of the switch
up to close it.
Express-Down Window
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The driver's window switch has an express-down
feature which allows the window to be lowered fully
without continuously pressing the switch. This switch is
labeled AUTO. Press the front of the switch to the first
position, and the driver's window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down fully and release.
The window goes all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch up.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Lockout (Sedan)
Theft-Deterrent Systems
o (Window Lockout): The driver's window controls
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of
the switch to prevent the rear passengers from using
their window switches. The driver can still control all the
windows with the lockout on. Press the switch to the left
to return to normal window operation. A red bar on the
right side of the switch indicates that the lockout feature
is off.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The visors
can also be detached from the center mount and swung
to the side to cover the windows.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Arming the System
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by
pressing the remote keyless entry transmitter
lock button.
Your vehicle may have a driver's side vanity mirror.
Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover to
expose the mirror.
The system will arm after either of these things occur:
.
Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.
.
Sixty seconds with any door open.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will arm
immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds if a
door is open. When the open door is closed, it will also
become armed.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened using
the trunk release button on the transmitter, the system
will temporarily disarm itself and re‐arm when the trunk
has been closed. This allows you to exit the vehicle,
lock the doors using the transmitter, and open the
trunk using the transmitter without having to disarm
and re‐arm the system.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, will turn on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
will flash once every three seconds.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will
stop flashing.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:
If you do not want to arm the system, you may lock the
car with the manual lock knobs, or the power door lock
switch, if equipped, on the doors.
.
Opening the driver's door or trunk. This will
cause a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed by
a thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
Disarming the System
.
Opening any other door. This will immediately
cause a full alarm of horn and lights for
thirty seconds.
You can disarm the system by doing any one of
the following:
.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
Press the remote keyless entry transmitter
unlock button.
.
Turn the ignition on.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
.
Press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The system will then re-arm itself.
.
Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. This will also disarm the system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
.
Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.
This will also disarm the system.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If you hear three chirps when you press the unlock,
lock, or trunk release buttons on the remote keyless
transmitter, it means that the content theft security
system alarm was previously activated.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be a
problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 6‑125. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service
the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7, for
more information.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transmission)
on page 5‑33 or Towing a Trailer (Manual
Transmission) on page 5‑39 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
.
Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Do not
exceed 5,000 engine rpm. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF.
Ignition Positions
On vehicles with a manual transmission, the ignition
switch can be turned to LOCK/OFF in any shift lever
position.
The steering can bind with the wheel turned off center.
If this happens, move it from right to left while turning
the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
WARNING:
{
If you have a manual transmission removing the
key from the ignition switch will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need
to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
The ignition switch has four different positions.
In order to shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of the electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the steering column
when the key is removed. The key can only be removed
in LOCK/OFF.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (ON/RUN): This is the position in which you can
operate the electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights.
The switch stays in this position when the engine is
running.
Column Lock Release
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
following procedure allows the ignition to be turned to
LOCK/OFF and ignition key to be removed in case of a
dead battery or low voltage battery.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery
could be drained. You may not be able to start the
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition.
2. Remove the cover from the bottom of the steering
column.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off.
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows, if equipped
.
Sunroof, if equipped
The power windows and sunroof will continue to
work for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.
The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to OFF/LOCK, the radio will continue to work
for 10 minutes or until the driver's door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
3. Locate the plunger.
4. Press and hold the plunger while turning the
ignition key to LOCK/OFF. Remove the key.
Automatic Transmission
Have the vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the vehicle when it is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the floor
and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down.
Starting Procedure
2. If the engine does not start after 5‐10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool. When the engine starts, let go of the
key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat the procedure. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down
as the engine warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm
up and lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds, cranking
will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to ACC/ACCESSORY
or LOCK/OFF.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer/retailer.
If you do not, the engine might not perform properly.
Any resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
WARNING:
{
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm‐up in cold
weather condition at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with am engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the passenger
side of the vehicle between the strut and the air
cleaner/filter.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts, and prevent damaged.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever is located on the console between the seats.
WARNING:
{
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
There are several
different positions for the
automatic transmission.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑32
.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission) on page 5‑33 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
page 5‑39
.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply the regular brakes first and then press the shift
lever button before the vehicle can shift from P (Park)
when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If the vehicle
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park)
as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and then move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park (Automatic Transmission)
WARNING:
{
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
on page 3‑33
.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑24
.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy. If you need more power for passing and
you are:
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
.
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 5‑16.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while
driving up steep hills, this position can be used to
prevent repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when driving on
hilly, winding roads and when towing a trailer, so that
there is less shifting between gears.
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern for standard models.
This is the shift pattern for SS models.
L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed more than
I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes. You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in L (Low), the transmission will
not shift into a low gear until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to operate the manual transmission:
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal down.
Notice: Do not rest your hand on the shift lever
while driving. The pressure could cause premature
wear in the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
N (Neutral).
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
N (Neutral): Use this position when you start or idle
the engine.
You can shift into 1 (First) when the vehicle is traveling
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the
shift lever in N (Neutral) and let up on the clutch pedal.
Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into
1 (First).
R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal
and shift into R (Reverse).
For SS models, lift upwards on the ring located on the
underside of the shift knob to shift into R (Reverse).
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Also, use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for
parking the vehicle.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shift Speeds
No‐Lift Upshift (SS Models)
If the vehicle has the 2.0L turbo engine and manual
transmission, it has the capability of No-Lift Upshifts.
This feature maximizes vehicle acceleration by allowing
you to shift the transmission to a higher gear without
taking your foot off the accelerator. No‐Lift Upshifting
is enabled in all Electronic Stability Control modes.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 for
more information. Use this feature only when the engine
has reached normal operating temperature. Correct
shifting allows the engine to maintain boost pressure
during shifts, while also keeping the engine from
over-revving.
WARNING:
{
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
Up-Shift Light
If the vehicle has a
To utilize this feature:
manual transmission,
there may be an up-shift
light. This light will show
you when to shift to the
next higher gear for the
best fuel economy.
1. Accelerate the vehicle by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
2. Just prior to reaching the maximum engine
speed, quickly complete the upshift utilizing
the clutch while keeping the accelerator pedal
fully applied. A quicker shift maneuver gives the
best performance. If the engine is operated at
the maximum engine speed for greater than
one second, the engine exits the No‐Lift Upshift
mode and resumes normal engine overspeed
protection.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
While accelerating, it is normal for the light to go on and
off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator.
Ignore the light when downshifting.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑23.
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in
as you move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime will
sound and the PARKING BRAKE message will appear
along with the brake system warning light when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑40.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
Automatic Shown, Manual Similar
The parking brake lever is located between the
front seats.
For vehicles equipped with an armrest, lift the console
armrest in order to access the parking brake lever.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Into Park
(Automatic Transmission)
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the
engine running.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission) on page 5‑33 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on
If you have to leave an automatic transmission vehicle
with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in
P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
P (Park), hold the brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without
first pushing the button. If you can, it means that the
shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
page 5‑39
.
To shift into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31 for
more information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Out of Park
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift into
P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You
may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set
the parking brake and then shift into P (Park) properly
before you leave the driver seat. To find out how, see
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on
(Automatic Transmission)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
.
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever
is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
.
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
page 3‑32
.
P (Park) unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.
Move the shift lever out of P (Park) before you release
the parking brake.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6‑42 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Parking Over Things That Burn
WARNING:
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the
shift lever button again.
{
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things
that can burn.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before leaving the vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
down, move the shift lever into R (Reverse), and firmly
apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has been
placed in R (Reverse) with the clutch pedal pressed
down, the ignition key can be turned to LOCK/OFF,
then remove the key and release the clutch pedal.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 3‑28.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
.
There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion
or damage.
(Continued)
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake and move the shift lever to
P (Park).
WARNING:
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen
or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed
area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission)
on page 3‑32
.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5‑33 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 5‑39.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust the outside mirror just to see the side of your
vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system and
how to subscribe to OnStar®. See the OnStar® owner's
guide for more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
Adjust the driver outside mirror with the control lever
located on the driver door. Adjust the outside mirrors so
that the side of the vehicle can be seen.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
If the vehicle has map lamps, press the buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror to turn them on or off.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are
located on the driver
door armrest.
Outside Convex Mirror
WARNING:
{
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside
mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located below the
four-way control pad to the left or right to choose
either the driver or passenger side mirror.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when
not adjusting either outside mirror.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a center console storage area, open
with the lever on the front of the console.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Driver Storage Compartment
Cupholders
The driver's storage compartment is located near the
left side of the steering column on the bottom of the
instrument panel. Pull the cover down to open.
There are two cupholders located at the front
of the center console, in front of the shift lever.
These cupholders have a liner that can be removed
for cleaning or to accommodate larger cup sizes.
There are also cupholders for the rear seat
Convenience Net
For vehickes with a convenience net, it is located
in the rear. Use it to store small loads as far forward
as possible. The net should not be used to store
heavy loads.
passengers located at the rear of the center console.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the sunroof switch rearward to open the sunroof
to the vent position. If the sunshade is closed, it must
be opened manually in the vent position. Press and
hold the switch rearward a second time to open the
sunroof. If the sunshade is closed, it will open
automatically when the sunroof is opened.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a
sunroof, the switch that
operates it is located on
the headliner between
the map lamps.
To close the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if the
switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade forward of the sliding
glass panel may cause damage and the sunroof
may not operate properly. Always close the glass
panel before closing the sunshade.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is on,
or turned to ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑23.
Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time.
Debris may collect in the tracks and possibly damage
the sunroof and plug the water draining system.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Wiper Activated Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Mirror Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4-18
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . . 4-24
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . 4-26
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Reconfigurable Performance Display (RPD) . . . 4-33
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
DIC Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Wheel
Instrument Panel Overview
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in
place.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is complete.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the following:
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
O : Exterior Lamp Control
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Flash-to-Pass.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
Information for these features is on the pages following.
page 6‑125
.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever away from you.
This indicator light
appears on the instrument
panel cluster when the
high beams are on.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
The windshield wiper lever is on the right side of the
steering column.
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
Flash-to-Pass
9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers off.
To signal to a driver in front of you that you want to
pass, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever until the
high-beam headlamps come on. Then release the lever
to turn them off.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): For
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount
of delay time varies between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle.
As vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiper
interval also increases or decreases.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x (Delay): Move the lever to the & position, then
turn the x band up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.
Windshield Washer
Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper
lever until the washers begin.
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.
WARNING:
{
8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the lever down, then
release it. Several wipes, hold the lever down.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw
them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume the
previous speed.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the
motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the
snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
Cruise Control
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle's headlamps turn on
automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the wipers
are turned off.
With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
The brake must be applied at least one time, after the
vehicle has been started, before cruise control will
function.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control
buttons are located on
the outboard side of the
steering wheel.
WARNING:
{
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
J (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on
and off.
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
Setting Cruise Control
SET– (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the
speed.
WARNING:
{
To set a speed do the following:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
1. Press J to turn the cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
2. Get to the speed desired.
3. Press the SET– part of the control button and
release it. The CRUISE ENGAGED message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brake is applied. This disengages the
cruise control. To return to the previously set speed,
you do not need to go through the set process again.
Once the vehicle is traveling at least 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more, press the RES+ part of the button briefly.
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
.
Push and hold the SET– part of the button until the
lower speed desired is reached, then release it.
.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET– part of the button briefly. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)
slower.
The vehicle returns to the previously selected speed
and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle's
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake
pedal, but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher
speed and reset the cruise control.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+ part of the button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed desired, and then
release the button. To increase the vehicle speed
in very small amounts, press the RES+ part of the
button briefly and then release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)
faster.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle's
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle's speed
down. Applying the brake will turn off the cruise control.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamp switch has the following
four positions:
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to end cruise control:
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps.
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal or the clutch pedal
if the vehicle has a manual transmission. This will
only end the current cruise control session.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
.
Press J to turn the system completely off.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically
turns on the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) during
daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps at night. This position must be selected
in order for the Wiper Activated Headlamps to be
activated. See Wiper Activated Headlamps on
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Headlamps
page 4‑10
.
P (Off/On): When operating in AUTO, a momentary
turn of the switch to Off/On will turn the Automatic
Headlamp System off or back on. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, the automatic transmission must be in
P (Park) or the manual transmission must have the park
brake set, before the Automatic Headlamp System can
be turned off.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DRL system will make the headlamps come on
when the following conditions are met:
Wiper Activated Headlamps
The headlamps and parking lamps are activated
15 seconds after the windshield wipers are turned on.
For this feature to work, automatic lighting must be
enabled. See Headlamps on page 4‑9 for additional
information.
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the
parking lamps only position.
.
The light sensor detects daytime light.
.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They also turn
off 15 seconds after the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights will
not be illuminated unless you have turned the exterior
lamps control to the parking lamp position.
Headlamps on Reminder
If the drivers door is opened with the ignition off and the
lamps on, a warning chime will sound. This indicates
that the headlamps are still on.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button is located on the
instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in
Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or the
head lamps will be on when not needed.
The ignition must be on to use the fog lamps.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on off. An indicator light
on the button comes on when the fog lamps are on.
The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when
the fog lamps are turned on and off.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Dome Lamp
The vehicle may have a dome lamp.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Move the lever to the following positions:
9 (Off): Turns the lamp off, even when a door is
opened.
Instrument Panel Brightness
1 (Door): Turns the lamp on whenever a door is
opened.
The control for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
+ (On): Turns the dome lamp on.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle will go on when any door
is opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds
after all of the doors have been closed or when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. These lamps will also go
on when pressing the trunk release, unlock symbol,
or the horn symbol button on the Remote Keyless Entry
System (RKE) Transmitter.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim the instrument panel lights,
when the parking lamps or headlamps are on.
After the key is removed from the ignition, the lamps
inside the vehicle stay on for about 20 seconds to
provide an illuminated exit.
Mirror Reading Lamps
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Press the button near each lamp to turn the
reading lamps on and off.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Electric Power Management
This vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM),
an advanced control system. It estimates the battery's
temperature and state of charge and then adjusts the
voltage for best performance and extended life of the
battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has
a voltmeter gauge or voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle's battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after 20 minutes.
This prevents draining of the battery.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console, rearward of the shift lever.
To use the accessory power outlet, remove the cover.
When not in use, always cover the accessory power
outlet with the protective cap.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
turn off electrical equipment when not in use
and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way and
let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 15 amperes.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire
ashtray and empty it.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Climate Controls
9 (Off): Turn the fan control to this position to turn the
fan off.
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. In any setting
other than off, the fan will run continuously with the
ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run the air
conditioning compressor.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
Select from the following modes:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown, without Air
Conditioning similar
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
A. Air Delivery Mode
Control
D. Air Conditioning
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Recirculation
B. Fan Control
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
air directed to the windshield and side windows.
C. Temperature Control
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side window,
and floor outlets. To defog the windows faster, turn the
temperature control knob clockwise to the warmest
setting. In this mode, the system runs the air
conditioning compressor.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1. Select the H mode.
2. Select the h mode.
3. Select #.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. To defrost the windows
faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise to
the warmest setting. In this mode, the system runs the
air conditioning compressor.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in the
vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation by pressing
the button again.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
# (Air Conditioning): For vehicles with air
conditioning, press this button to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. An indicator light
comes on to show that the air conditioning is on.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on
when the fan is off.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
h (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that
recirculation is on.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air conditioning compressor also comes on.
Recirculation is not available for floor, defog and
defrost modes. If recirculation is selected in any of
these modes, the recirculate indicator light flashes
five times and outside air will be delivered. Operation
in this mode during periods of high humidity and cool
outside temperatures may result in increased window
fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select the
defrost mode.
The rear window defogger turns off about 15 minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger only runs for about seven minutes before
turning off. If the vehicle is moving faster than 50 mph
(80 kph), the rear defogger will stay on. The defogger
can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Outside Air: This mode allows outside air to circulate
through the vehicle. This mode is automatically active
if recirculate is not selected. There is no button for
outside air.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheels located next to and below the air
outlets to change the direction of the airflow and to
open and close the outlets.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on
or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible. An indicator light comes on to
show that the rear window defogger is on.
inlets at the base of the windshield that may block
the flow of air into the vehicle.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter removes dust and pollen from the air which is
drawn into the vehicle. Airflow reduction is an indication
that the filter needs to be replaced.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3 for replacement intervals. To find
out what type of filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7‑13.
To access the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Open and empty the glove box.
3. Pull the tab at the back of the glove box toward
you and open the passenger compartment air filter
door downward.
2. Lower the glove box door by pressing in on each
side and lowering from the track.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there
is a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
4. Pull the filter out toward you.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
Install the new air filter with the AIR FLOW arrow
pointing downward. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reassemble.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States SS, Manual Transmission Cluster shown, Canada, Base and Automatic Transmission similar
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the speed in both kilometers
per hour (km/h) and miles per hour (mph).
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The vehicle's odometer works together with the Driver
Information Center (DIC). Trip A and Trip B can be set
on the odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑38.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
The vehicle does not have to be running to check the
odometer mileage. Simply open the driver's door and
the mileage briefly displays.
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct total mileage of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, the
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt
reminder light, several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
WARNING:
{
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 2‑53.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40 for more information.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. The passenger airbag status
indicator, if equipped, is on the instrument panel. See
Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo Engine) on
page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing System (With Turbo
Engine) on page 2‑67 for important safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for more information, including important safety
information.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
If using remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle
from a distance, you may not see the system check.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
This light comes on briefly
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 3‑28 for
more information.
when the ignition is turned
on, and the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. Then it
should go out when the
engine is started.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking both
parts need to be working well.
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your dealer/retailer. Driving while
this light is on could drain the battery.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
If a short distance must be driven with the light on,
turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
Up-Shift Light
The vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release. If it
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it
means the vehicle has a brake problem.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is fully
released. The pedal might be harder to push or, the
pedal could go closer to the floor. It can take longer to
stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or
two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑30.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
WARNING:
{
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑23.
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for
more information.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), this light
serves as an indicator
and warning light.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system
or the Traction Control
System (TCS), the
indicator/warning light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
This light comes on briefly while the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the indicator/warning light is on and not flashing,
the ETS system could have been disabled. Check all
related Driver Information Center (DIC) messages to
determine whether the system has been turned off or
if the system is not working properly and the vehicle
requires service. If the ETS has been disabled, wheel
spin is not limited.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
If this light is on while certain DIC messages display,
this indicates that the ESC and TCS are not working or
are disabled.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the ETS
is actively working. The LOW TRACTION DIC message
also appears when the system is actively limiting
wheel spin.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled.
Check the DIC messaging to determine which feature(s)
is no longer functioning and whether it is because of the
driver turning off the feature(s), or because the system
is not working properly and the vehicle requires service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited. If the
ESC system is disabled, the system does not aid in
maintaining directional control of the vehicle.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS
or the ESC system is actively working. Check the DIC
messaging for details to determine which system is
working. If the LOW TRACTION message appears,
the system is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE
message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑34
The vehicle's engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never
drive with the engine coolant temperature warning
light on.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6
and Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 for
more information.
.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for
more information on the messages associated with this
light.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑34 for
more information.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for
about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑68 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑38 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑66
for more information.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the
vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑4.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can
prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑10. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or might begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
WARNING:
{
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack
of OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps
are in use.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
Security Light
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4‑10 for more information.
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
Highbeam On Light
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3‑16
.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
The gauge moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows
about how much fuel the
vehicle has left.
The gauge does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.
For the fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑131.
Boost Gauge
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:
.
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gauge reads full.
United States
Canada
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank's
capacity to fill the tank.
If equipped, this gauge is located near the driver side of
the instrument panel cluster.
This gauge indicates vacuum during light to moderate
throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This gauge displays the air pressure level in the intake
manifold before it enters the engine's combustion
chamber.
This gauge is automatically centered at zero every
time the engine is started. Actual vacuum or boost is
displayed from this zero point. Changes in ambient
pressure, such as driving in mountains and changing
weather, will slightly change the zero reading.
Reconfigurable Performance
Display (RPD)
For vehicles with the RPD, the screen displays
information that can be used to monitor vehicle
performance. The RPD knob located next to the
screen is used to configure the display and select
information to be viewed.
RPD Screen Example US Version Shown, Canada
Similar (French Display Currently Not Available)
The RPD screen displays two divided areas (A, B) of
information called Regions. Advance through Region A
screens to show various gauges and speedometer
displays. Advance through Region B screens to show
digital readouts and indicator information.
A short video plays whenever the ignition key is turned
on. Press the RPD knob to stop the video and go
directly to RPD displays.
The position of these regions can be reversed.
See the SETUP MENU for more information.
When the ignition is turned off and then back on, the
RPD shows the last screen displayed.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPEEDOMETER & G FORCE : The G FORCE meter
displays lateral acceleration. While turning right,
G forces are felt on the left, and vice versa. PEAK
values are stored indefinitely, and can be reset with a
press and hold of the RPD knob while viewing the
G FORCE meter.
Region A Gauge and Speedometer
Displays
Change the information displayed in Region A by
turning the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise.
The available gauges are:
SETUP MENU: Press the RPD knob to enter this
menu. The vehicle should be stopped while configuring
the setup menu selections.
BOOST: Displays positive boost pressure as
determined by the manifold air pressure (MAP) sensor.
AIR/FUEL RATIO: Displays the mass ratio of air to fuel.
SCREEN OFF: Turns the screen off.
CAM PHASER ANGLES: Displays orientation of the
intake and exhaust cam shafts relative to their park
positions as commanded by the engine control module.
OVERLAP represents the total distance the intake and
exhaust cam shafts have phased.
Region B Readout Displays
Press the RPD knob to highlight Region B. The
information displayed can be changed by turning
the RPD knob either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Press the RPD knob again, to store the selection.
The selection will also be stored after a few seconds
of no activity. Available modes are:
SPARK ADVANCE/ KNOCK RETARD: The spark
advance gauge displays ignition timing. Knock retard
indicates the amount of ignition delay to reduce spark
knock.
Readouts #1
ENGINE POWER & TORQUE : Displayed engine
power and torque are engine flywheel output values
calculated by the engine control module. These
values are approximate and may change with the air
conditioning load, generator output, air temperature,
air pressure, and fuel octane.
SHIFT LIGHTS/GEAR INDICATION: The shift lights
provide visual identification of engine speed for a
transmission gear. Shift light minimum and maximum
RPM settings can be viewed and configured in the
SETUP screen. The gear indication on manual
transmission vehicles is calculated by the engine
control module. The gear is only displayed when
enough torque is available to determine the selected
forward gear.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Readouts #2
INDICATORS
TIRE PRESSURES: Displays the last gauge tire
pressures recorded from each of the wheel mounted
tire pressure sensors.
The indicators come on when the corresponding
function is actively working to stabilize or control the
vehicle. Each indicator light on the RPD display can
be turned on and off using the SETUP MENU. These
indicators work independently of the telltales on the
instrument panel cluster. Turning the indicator on the
RPD display on or off does not enable or disable the
functions on the vehicle.
Readouts #3
BAROMETER: Displays ambient air pressure as
measured by the engine’s ambient pressure sensor.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE: Displays ambient
temperature as measured by an outside air temperature
sensor.
BATTERY VOLTAGE: Displays the vehicle’s battery
voltage.
Readouts #4
COOLANT TEMPERATURE: Displays engine coolant
temperature as measured by a coolant temperature
sensor.
This indicator comes on whenever the vehicle
StabiliTrak® is actively working.
INLET AIR TEMPERATURE: Displays the
instantaneous temperature of the air at the inlet
to the induction system.
FUEL PRESSURE: Displays fuel pressure as
measured by a sensor on the output of the
high-pressure fuel pump.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP MENU
The SETUP MENU allows for the appearance of each
display screen to be customized. Turn the knob to scroll
through the screens to reach the SETUP MENU. Press
and release the knob to activate the SETUP MENU.
This indicator comes on when Competitive Driving
Mode (A) has been set using the traction control switch.
This telltale comes on whenever conditions are right for
the Launch Mode (B) to activate.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 for
more information on Competitive Driving Mode and
Launch Control.
Selecting a SETUP MENU Option
1. Under SETUP MENU there are six menu options
to choose. Turn the RPD knob to highlight an
option.
This indicator comes on whenever the vehicle Traction
Control system is actively working.
2. Press and release the RPD knob to select the
highlighted menu option.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTRAST: While the contrast slider is highlighted,
press the knob to allow adjustment. Turn the knob to
adjust the contrast of the screen. Press the knob again
when the desired contrast is reached.
SETUP MENU Options
GAUGE APPEARANCE: While the gauge is
highlighted, press the RPD knob. Then turn the knob to
choose the background color for a gauge. Press the
knob again when gauge color is chosen.
RESTORE DEFAULTS: Restores the original factory
screen defaults.
SHIFT LIGHT SETUP: This screen establishes a RPM
range where the shift light comes on for each gear.
Turn the RPD knob to highlight a shift light setting.
Press the knob to allow adjustment of the highlighted
setting. Turn the knob to adjust the value up or down,
then press the knob again to allow the selection of
another item. The number above each gear shows
the highest RPM the light comes on for a gear range.
The number below each gear indicates the lowest RPM
the light comes on for a gear range.
Applying a SETUP MENU Option
After each screen is customized, use this procedure to
apply the change and return to the SETUP MENU.
SET: Applies the changes to the display.
1. Turn until SET is highlighted.
2. Press and release while SET is highlighted to lock
in the setting and return to the previous screen.
RETURN /RET: Returns the display to the previous
screen without saving changes.
INDICATORS ON/OFF: Select on or off for each
indicator by turning the RPD knob to highlight ON or
OFF. Press and Release the RPD knob to apply the
choice. The actual Traction Control, StabiliTrak®,
Competitive Mode, Launch Control functions and
instrument panel cluster telltales are not enabled or
disabled by these indicators.
1. Turn to highlight the RETURN/RET option.
2. Press and release knob to return to the
previous menu.
SCREEN ORDER: While the screen order is
highlighted, press the knob to allow adjustment. Turn
the knob to reverse the displayed order of Region A and
Region B. Press the knob again once the screen is
chosen.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons to
enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑46 for more information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle's systems. The DIC is also used to display
driver personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer display. This mode
shows the temperature outside of the vehicle in either
degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). The outside air
temperature appears on the left side of the DIC display
and the odometer appears on the right side of the
display.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑46
.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIPA or TRIP B
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until TRIPA or TRIP B
display. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers
can be used at the same time.
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
your vehicle is getting based on current and past
driving conditions.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is
continually updated each time you drive.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance
you can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at
a particular moment and changes frequently as driving
conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous
fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average fuel
economy, this screen cannot be reset.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW
displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually
updated. The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle's average speed in miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF
displays for the front tires. Press the information button
again until LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear
tires.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil's
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system is
reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the tire pressure appears in the display.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑66 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for
more information.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
on page 6‑17 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7‑3
.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle's systems.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
under Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑21.
A message clears when the vehicle's condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off
and back on. With most messages, a warning chime
sounds when the message displays. Your vehicle may
have other warning messages.
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the temperature of the engine
coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C).
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
Monitoring System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire
can be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
COMPETITIVE MODE
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Competitive Driving mode is selected. The
Traction Control System (TCS) will not be operating
while in the Competitive Driving mode and the
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster will be
on solid. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9, Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6, and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for more
information.
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑23 for
more information. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
CHANGE OIL SOON
COOLING MODE ON
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
This message may display on some vehicles. Under
severe conditions, hot ambient temperatures, steep
grades, and towing, your vehicle may experience more
transmission shifting. This is temporary and normal
under these conditions. This does not require engine
or transmission service.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be reset
separately. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑21
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more
information.
CRUISE ENGAGED
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays when the cruise control system
is active. See Cruise Control on page 4‑6 for more
information.
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it is
on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOOR AJAR
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle's
doors are open. Make sure that the door(s) are closed
completely.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting
you with directional control of the vehicle. You may
feel or hear the system working and see this message
displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may
exist when this message is displayed, so adjust your
driving accordingly. This message may stay on for
a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. This is normal
when the system is operating. See Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for more
information.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message displays to inform you that the vehicle
has reduced engine power to avoid damaging the
engine. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's
ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) NOT
READY
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message may display briefly after starting the
vehicle if the system's sensors are not yet calibrated.
The system is not functional until the message stops
displaying. Adjust your driving accordingly. When
the message is no longer displayed, the system is
functional. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 5‑6 for more information.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
LAUNCH CONTROL
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when
ESC is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for
more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
after the COMPETITIVE MODE message when the
vehicle is stopped. Launch control is a form of traction
control to control wheel spin while launching the vehicle
during closed track events and competitive driving
venues. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE MODE
after the vehicle is launched. See “COMPETITIVE
MODE” earlier in this section. See “Launch Control”
under Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6
for more information.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
LEARN COMPLETE
On vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, this message displays when the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) has completed the tire learning
process. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6‑67 for more information.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery
in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
LOW COOLANT
page 3‑4
.
If your vehicle has a 2.0L engine, this message displays
when there is a low level of engine coolant. Have the
cooling system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible. See Engine Coolant on page 6‑29 for
more information.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW FUEL
POWER STEERING
This message displays when your vehicle is low on
fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 4‑32, Fuel on page 6‑6, and Filling
the Tank on page 6‑10 for more information.
This message displays if a problem has been detected
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE AIR BAG
LOW TRACTION
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your
driving accordingly. This message stays on for a few
seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12
or Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 and
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25 or Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25 for more information.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for more
information.
PARKING BRAKE
This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31 for more
information.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then
back on. If this message still stays on or turns back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
SVC (Service) BRAKE SYSTEM
This message may display if you have a turbocharged
vehicle with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and if
the hydraulic brake boost is not working or is working
improperly. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
SERVICE TRACTION
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this message displays if
a part on the TPMS is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 4‑27. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑68 for more information. If the warning comes
on and stays on, there may be a problem with the
TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and a chime sounds when the system is not
functioning properly. The ETS light or the ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12 or Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 and Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning Light on
page 4‑25 or Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on
page 4‑25 for more information. Have the system
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIRE LEARN ON
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12
or Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 and
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25 or Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25 for more information.
Monitoring System (TPMS) and does not have the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system, this message
displays when the TPMS is re-learning the tire positions
on your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned
after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑73
,
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑67, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑66 for more
information.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR
TRUNK AJAR
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this message displays
when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle's tires
is low. The low tire pressure warning light will also come
on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑27. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 6‑57, Loading the Vehicle on
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on your
vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on
the DIC.
page 5‑25, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑66
.
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑38
.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the
engine oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 6‑21. See “OIL LIFE” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑38 for more
information.
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
UNITS
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to
enter the personalization menu.
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
If the vehicle speed is greater than 3 km/h (2 mph),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the
available settings for each mode.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIRE LEARN?
LOCK HORN
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this mode is available on
vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system. After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire
or sensor, the TPMS must re-learn the tire positions.
To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 6‑67. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑73 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑40 for more information.
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle's horn to chirp every
time the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
can be enabled or disabled. When LOCK HORN
appears on the display, press and hold the reset button
for at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn will
still chirp on the second press.
REMOTE START
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. When
REMOTE START appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑6 for more
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLOCK HORN
LIGHT FLASH
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle's horn to chirp on the
first press of the unlock button on the RKE transmitter,
can be enabled or disabled. When UNLOCK HORN
appears on the display, press and hold the reset button
for at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle's exterior hazard/turn
signal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock,
or trunk release buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LIGHT
FLASH appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on
the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAY LOCK
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter a second time.
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver's door will automatically unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the door(s)
will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter.
If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you
can select when the automatic unlocking will occur.
See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission Only)”
following.
See Power Door Locks on page 3‑9, Delayed Locking
on page 3‑10, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4 for more information.
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on
page 3‑10 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic
Transmission Only)
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle's exterior perimeter
lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on
page 3‑10 for more information.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANGUAGE
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
WARNING:
{
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any of
the following conditions occur:
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
.
A ten second time period has elapsed.
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
.
The ignition is turned off.
radio stations.
.
The end of the personalization menu list is
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
reached.
page 5‑2
.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Setting the Clock
Without Date Display
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player
To set the time:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes
may not work. Make sure that replacement or
additional equipment is compatible with your
vehicle before installing it. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on the
display. Press H a second time and the minute
begins flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3‑23 for more information.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn
the f knob to the desired option to select the setting.
Press the H button again to apply the setting, or let the
screen time out.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
With Date Display
date press H while the radio is on. The date with
display times out after a few seconds and goes back
to the normal radio and time display.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and
Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player
To set the time and date:
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
4. To increase the time or date do one of the
following:
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or let
the screen time out.
.
Press the softkey located below the
selected tab.
.
Press ¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.
.
Turn f clockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
.
Press © SEEK or s REV.
.
Turn f counterclockwise.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio(s)
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio
with CD (MP3) similar
Radio with CD (Base)
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is
available for use only on FM stations that broadcast
RDS information. This system relies upon receiving
specific information from these stations and only
works when the information is available.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a
radio station could broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base).
Press to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on
the Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port or the Radio
with CD (MP3).
Playing the Radio
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
© SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate
for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or
slows down, so that the volume level is consistent.
.
To seek stations, press and release © SEEK to
go to the previous station and stay there.
.
To scan stations, press and hold © SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
goes to the next station. Press © SEEK again to
stop scanning.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on
the radio display.
.
To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold © SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
stored preset. Press © SEEK again to stop
scanning preset stations.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
line of the display while the artist information will be
displayed on the bottom line, it the information is
available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.
When information is not available, “No Info” displays.
¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
.
To seek stations, press and release ¨ SEEK to
go to the next station and stay there.
Storing Radio Stations
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
.
To scan stations, press and hold ¨ SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press ¨ SEEK again to
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
stop scanning.
Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as
favorites.
.
To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ¨ SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel
controls. See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
stored preset. Press ¨ SEEK again to stop
scanning preset stations.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below
the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV to go
through up to six pages of favorites, each having
six favorite stations available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or
XM stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings
are also stored with the favorite stations.
4 (Information): For vehicles with the Radio with CD
(Base), press to switch the display between the radio
station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off,
press 4 to display the time.
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
press 4 to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA
song. Song title information will be displayed on the top
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store a station as a favorite:
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and
WMA features): If additional information is available
for the current song being played, Auto Text will
automatically page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio
display. By default, Auto Text is enabled.
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired
levels.
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the
station.
To change the Auto Text setting:
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds.
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the
radio display.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be
stored as a favorite.
3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the
radio display.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information is
longer than what can be displayed, the extra information
will page every three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to
the original main radio screen showing the radio
station frequency tabs and to begin programming
favorites.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB Port or the Radio with CD (MP3):
Storing a Radio Station as a Preset
Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio
stations as presets.
1. Press f until the tone control tabs display.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered buttons.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be
adjusted.
3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange,
or treble:
To store preset stations:
1. Tune in the desired station.
.
Press ¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.
2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons
for three seconds until a beep sounds.
.
Turn f clockwise.
3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered
button.
4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange,
or treble:
Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
.
Press © SEEK, or s REV.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones such as BASS,
MID, and TREB.
.
Turn f counterclockwise.
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey
below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than
two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with
CD (Base):
Press f until the tone control labels display, then
turn f to change the setting.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all
tone and speaker controls to the middle position by
pressing f for more than two seconds until the radio
beeps once.
If a station's frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To adjust balance or fade using `:
1. Press ` until the speaker control labels display.
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
2. Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker
or treble by pressing f.
control label displays.
3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can also
be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
\ FWD, or s REV.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade
to the middle position by pressing the softkey below the
BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio
beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the
Balance/Fade can be adjusted using f or `.
To adjust balance or fade using f:
1. Press f until the speaker control tabs display.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab,
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone
and speaker controls to the middle position by
or continue pressing f to highlight the desired tab.
pressing f for more than two seconds until the radio
beeps once.
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
by pressing either SEEK arrow.
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also
be used to adjust the highlighted level.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature.
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn f to display the category to be removed.
To select and find a desired category:
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the
radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab.
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category, do one of the
following:
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
.
Turn f.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
.
Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows
on the radio display.
.
Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites
again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Ejecting a CD
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
Radio Messages for XM Only
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑72 for more
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track,
if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving backward
through the tracks on the CD.
information.
Loading a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
.
The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
To use random:
.
The road is very rough. When the road becomes
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
smoother, the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
.
A problem may have occurred while burning
the CD.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the track number displays when a CD is in
the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found
may display.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc. See Using an MP3 on page 4‑66 for
more information.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
Care of CDs
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of a
CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all. Do not
touch the bottom of a CD while handling it. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make
sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is
not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into
the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device
such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary
input jack for use as another audio source.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
USB Support
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
USB Supported Devices
O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud.
.
USB Flash Drives
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
.
Fifth generation or later iPod
.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.
The portable audio device continues playing until
it is stopped or turned off.
iPod nano
.
iPod touch
.
iPod classic
Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the
USB port.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary
input. Press again and the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
may display.
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from
Apple® for proper operation. iPod firmware can be
updated using the latest iTunes® application.
See www.apple.com/itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
www.apple.com/support.
Using the USB Port
Radio's with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
See Using an MP3 on page 4‑66 for information about
how to connect and control a USB storage device or
an iPod.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
Using an MP3
Format
The radio supports:
.
Up to 700 folders.
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3's can
play.mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can
play.mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB
storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on
an iPod®.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 65,535 files.
.
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
Compressed Audio
.
FAT16
The radio can play discs that contain both
.
FAT32
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files. If both
formats are on the disc, the radio reads all MP3 files
first, then the uncompressed CD audio files.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
.
Empty Folder
Up to 50 folders.
.
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 50 playlists.
.
Up to 255 files.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks are played in the following order:
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there
is no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename is not displayed.
Release s REV to resume playing.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
desired artist displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey
below S c to go to the first track in the previous
folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to
go to the first track in the next folder.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD
in random, rather than sequential order. To use random,
press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays to play songs from the current CD
in random order. Press the same softkey again to turn
off random play.
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab
from the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins to
play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
below h to have the files played in order by
artist or album. The player scans the disc to sort
the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It can
take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the
number of files on the disc. The radio may begin playing
while it is scanning in the background.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to
the USB port located on the front of the radio.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located on
the front of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the
radio's display. The iPod music appears on the radio’s
display and begins playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if
the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle's battery.
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
4 (Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below c.
To use the softkeys:
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio
display to display the functions listed below,
or press the softkey below the function if it is
currently displayed.
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function
on it to use that function.
folder.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
used. Press the softkey below j again to resume
playback.
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey
below h to view and select a file on an iPod,
using the iPod's menu system. Files are sorted by:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Albums
.
Genres
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Songs
.
.
Composers
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
To select files:
Repeat Functionality
1. Press the softkey below h.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.
3. Press f to select the desired menu.
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or ' to select between
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is
being used. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shuffle Functionality
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to
select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to
turn shuffle off. This is the default mode when a
USB storage device or iPod is first connected.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the
XM™ signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open
area, the signal should return.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the
USB storage device or iPod.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth : This channel is blocked or cannot
be received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Recognition
Bluetooth Controls
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to
interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84 for more
information.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls, to
confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the
audio system volume knob, during a call, to change
the volume level. The adjusted volume level remains
in memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
.
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
.
.
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN
number that was provided in Step 3.
.
.
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
.
If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
.
Deleting a Paired Phone
If another phone is not found, the original
phone remains connected.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Storing Name Tags
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>? Yes
or No” followed by a tone.
.
Store
.
Digit Store
.
Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
Using the Digit Store Command
.
If the system recognizes the number it
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats the
phone number.
.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re‐entered.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
Delete
.
Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
.
Dial
.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
.
the name tag. The system responds with
“OK, deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
Digit Dial
.
Call
.
Re‐dial
.
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”.
The system responds with “No. OK, let's
try again, please say the name tag.”
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. Number please” followed by
a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
.
If the system recognizes the number, it
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
.
If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be re‐
entered.
.
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
.
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to
the main menu.
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Using the Digit Dial Command
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling, <name
tag>” and dials the number. If the name tag is
not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for
the name tag to be re‐entered.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re‐dial Command
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The system responds
with “Re‐dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Using the Call Command
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving a Call
Three‐Way Calling
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Three‐Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
.
Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
1. While on a call press b g. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
Press c x to ignore a call.
2. Say “Three‐way call”. The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say dial or call”.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
.
Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
.
Ending a Call
Press b g again to return to the original call.
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
.
Press c x to end a call.
.
Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Muting a Call
Transferring a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
Audio can be transferred between the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
To Mute a call
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Cancel Mute
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected
with the Bluetooth system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process can take up to
two minutes after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Number During a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
.
The cell phone's normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone's
operating instructions.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to send.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, Sending
<name tag>” and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle's options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Other Information
e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
w / x (Next / Previous): Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and
navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for FCC
information.
4-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change radio stations:
3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
the list.
.
Press and release w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a preset.
.
To select a folder, press and hold w when the
folder is highlighted.
.
Press and hold w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with
a strong signal.
.
To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold x.
To select tracks on a CD:
c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous
track.
b g (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:
For vehicles with Bluetooth® or OnStar® systems press
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See Bluetooth® on page 4‑73 and
the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the
Radio Reception
list, then press and hold w to play the highlighted
track.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and hold x to go back to the previous
folder list.
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with
the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur
when making or receiving phone calls, charging the
phone's battery, or simply having the phone on. This
interference causes an increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is received while listening
to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Fixed Mast Antenna
FM Stereo
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged as long as it is securely
attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent,
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,
replace it.
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
or the rear of the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of
obstructions for clear radio reception.
4-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Racing or Other Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transmission) . . . . . 5-33
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) . . . . . . . . 5-39
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑10.
WARNING:
{
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
Braking
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑23.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑9, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 5‑12, and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
page 5‑6
.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot
of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot
of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
feel changes or the brake pedal feels hard to push, the
system might not be receiving the intended brake boost
and the SVC BRAKE SYSTEM DIC message may be
displayed.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
helps prevent a braking skid.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
If the vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel comes
on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and
the 2.0L turbocharged engine, it also has a hydraulic
brake boost feature which supplements the power brake
system to maintain consistent brake performance under
conditions of low brake booster vacuum. Low brake
booster vacuum conditions can include initial start up
after the vehicle has been parked for several hours,
very frequent brake stops, or high altitude driving. When
hydraulic brake boost is active, minor brake pulsation or
movement might be felt but this is normal. If brake pedal
When the engine is started, or when the vehicle begins
to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
with Antilock Brake System (ABS), it allows the driver
to steer and brake at the same time. However, if the
vehicle does not have ESC with ABS, the first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — might be the wrong thing to do. The wheels can
stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond
to the driver's steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very
thing the driver was trying to avoid, or into traffic.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
If the vehicle does not have ABS, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This gives maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. Do this by pushing on the
brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This
helps retain steering control. Without ABS, it is different.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal
pulsation might be felt or some noise noticed, but this is
normal.
In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Assist
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
If this vehicle has ESC with ABS, it also has a Brake
Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping
or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the stability system
hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power
brake system under conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an
attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake control module
increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle
until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time is normal and the
driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the
driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will
automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
The vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, and
traction and stability control systems that help the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light comes on, and the ESC OFF and/or SERVICE
ESC message displays.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4‑38 and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the
system on. ESC can be turned off if needed.
This light flashes on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system is
on and activated.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control of
the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See
Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
ESC activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. ESC
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the
vehicle's brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended
direction.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.
When the system activates, an ESC ACTIVE message
displays on the Driver Information Center. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40. This light also
flashes on the instrument panel cluster when the ESC
system is on and activated. Noise or vibration may be
felt in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer
the vehicle in the desired direction.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both
traction control and ESC, press and hold the button
from five to ten seconds.
When the light is on solid and the message(s),
SERVICE ESC, ESC OFF, or both display, the system
will not assist the driver in maintaining directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages appear, and the
ESC/TCS light comes on to warn the driver that
both traction control and ESC are disabled.
Competitive Driving Mode
(SS Models Only)
The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ESC/TCS button on the console two times
quickly. COMPETITIVE MODE will be displayed in the
It is recommended that the system remain on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40
.
Competitive Driving Mode allows the driver to have full
control of the front wheels while the ESC system helps
maintain directional control of the vehicle by selective
brake application. The ESC/TCS light will be on and the
traction control system will not be operating. Adjust your
driving accordingly. This electronic stability control
mode is recommended only for use during closed track
events and competitive driving venues.
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑24
.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light
comes on to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for
service. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40 for more information.
When the ESC button is pressed again, or the vehicle is
restarted, the ESC and TCS will be turned back on.
Notice: When traction control is turned off,
or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible
to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the
front wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is
possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book for
additional information.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4 for more information.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Launch Control (SS Models Only)
Traction Control System (TCS)
Launch Control is a form of traction control, to control
tire spin while launching the vehicle during closed track
events and competitive driving. The feature is activated
when the vehicle is at rest while in Competitive Mode.
At rest, if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor
with the clutch engaged, the RPM is limited to a
predetermined level. A smooth, quick release of the
clutch while keeping the accelerator pedal on the floor
will provide controlled wheel spin for consistent
acceleration. Complete shifts as described in Manual
Transmission Operation on page 3‑28.
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much or
are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power by closing the throttle and managing engine
spark to limit wheel spin.
This light flashes while
the traction control system
is limiting wheel spin.
LAUNCH CONTROL displays in the DIC after the
COMPETITIVE MODE message, when the vehicle is
stopped. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE MODE
after the vehicle is launched. See “Competitive Driving
Mode” earlier in this section. The normal Traction
Control System (TCS) will not be operating while in the
Competitive Driving mode and the TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40 for more information.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for
more information.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is in cruise control while TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 4‑4.
It may also be necessary to turn off the system when
driving in off-road conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow on page 5‑24.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release the
ESC/TCS button located
on the instrument panel.
When this light is on and
either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is
displayed, the system will
not limit wheel spin.
The DIC displays the appropriate message as
described previously when the button is pressed.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑40 for more information.
Traction Control Operation
The Traction Control System comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. It is recommended to
leave the system on for normal driving conditions,
but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the
vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you
want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it.
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management) and
by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses that either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. For
more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑38.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction in
acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control while the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light flashes and the cruise
control automatically disengages. The cruise control
can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See
Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, the
differential could be damaged. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and this message
are displayed.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4 for more information.
Notice: When traction control is turned off,
or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible
to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the
drive wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is
possible to cause damage to the transmission. Do
not attempt to shift when the drive wheels do not
have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See the warranty book for
additional information.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
The vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transmission to limit wheel spin.
The ETS indicator/warning light may come on for the
following reasons:
If the vehicle has ETS, there is not an ESC/TCS button
on the instrument panel. To turn the system off, shift to
L (Low) or R (Reverse). There is more information about
how to turn the system off later in this section.
.
The indicator/warning light flashes while the
traction control system is limiting wheel spin.
.
If the system is turned off by moving the shift lever
The ETS indicator/warning light flashes and LOW
TRACTION appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) when the traction control system is actively
limiting wheel spin. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is normal. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly.
to L (Low), the indicator/warning light comes on
and stays on. To turn the system back on, move
the shift lever back to a position other than L (Low).
The indicator/warning light should go off.
.
The indicator/warning light will come on when the
parking brake is set with the engine running, and it
will stay on if the parking brake does not release
fully. If the transmission shift lever is in any position
other than L (Low) and the indicator/warning light
stays on after the parking brake is fully released,
there is a problem with the system.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the ETS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
.
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine related problem, the system will turn off
and the indicator/warning light will come on.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ETS indicator/warning light comes on and
stays on for an extended period of time when the
transmission shift lever is in any position other than
L (Low), the vehicle may need service.
When the system is turned off, the ETS indicator/
warning light will come on and stay on and the
TRACTION OFF message will be displayed when
the gear shift is in L (Low). The indicator/warning light
and message will not come on when the gear shift is in
R (Reverse). If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when the
transmission is shifted to L (Low) or R (Reverse) to
turn the system off, the indicator/warning light and
TRACTION OFF will come on in L (Low). But the
system will not turn off right away. It will wait until
there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
When this light is on solid, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Check the DIC messaging to determine whether it is
because of the driver turning off the system, or that the
system may not be working properly and the vehicle
requires service. When this light is turned on, either the
SERVICE TRACTION or TRACTION OFF message will
be displayed.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
The system can be turned back on at any time by
shifting to D (Automatic Overdrive) or I (Intermediate).
The ETS indicator/warning light should go off.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, ETS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4 for more information.
To turn the system off, shift to L (Low) or R (Reverse).
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message
comes on, contact your dealer/retailer for service
repairs. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
Limited-Slip Differential
Vehicles with a limited-slip differential can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is
low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle. The limited slip design
has minimal impact to the steering feel, but boosts the
traction performance under all conditions.
page 4‑40
.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering
assist system will continue to operate until you are able
to stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost
because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take
more effort.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should
return shortly after a few normal steering movements.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
These problems can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
See Braking on page 5‑3. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on
the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the
ESC might activate. See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5‑6.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) or
the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), remember: It
helps to avoid only the acceleration skid. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 or Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12. If the vehicle
does not have TCS or ETS, or if the system is off, then
an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If the
vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough
pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.
This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal
down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long
as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
.
.
Watch for animals.
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving. After reviewing your
warranty book, please see the GM Performance Parts
website or catalog and contact the race sanctioning
bodies, for example Sports Car Club of America
(SCCA) or Grand American, for parts and equipment
required for racing or other competitive driving.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
Driving at Night
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving tips include:
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.
.
Drive defensively.
.
Do not drink and drive.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
WARNING:
{
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
.
.
.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6‑57
.
.
Turn off cruise control.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other driving tips include:
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road
ahead and to the sides.
Things to check on your own include:
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
Windows clean — inside and outside?
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
.
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
Highway Hypnosis
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
lower gear.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
You would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
the engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
WARNING:
{
.
.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
(Continued)
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Without ABS, if the vehicle begins to slide, let up on the
brake pedal a little and apply steady pedal pressure to
get the most traction. On vehicles without ABS, braking
so hard that the wheels stop rolling can cause the
vehicle to slide — brake so the wheels always keep
rolling so you can still steer.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur
on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑9 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 5‑12, it improves the ability to accelerate on
slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. When driving through deep snow,
turn off the ETS, if equipped, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but whether the vehicle has ABS or not,
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
snow does not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
(Continued)
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑24.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system.
Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission, between 1 (First) or
2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as
little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after
a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
WARNING:
{
page 5‑30
.
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑82.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all nonfactory‐installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification
label.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver door open, you will find
the label either attached above the door lock post
for a two door vehicle or below the door lock post
for a four door vehicle. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the tire size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6‑57 and Inflation - Tire
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Pressure on page 6‑66
.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle;
see “Certification Label” later in this section.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5‑33
or Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on
page 5‑39 for important information on towing
a trailer, towing safety rules, and
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
trailering tips.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle's capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification label, found on
the rear edge of the driver door, tells you the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
WARNING:
{
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
If there is a heavy load, it should be spread out.
.
Put things in the cargo area of the
WARNING:
{
vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as far
forward as you can. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
.
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Towing Your Vehicle
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 8‑7.
.
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long
they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
Recreational Vehicle Towing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑20.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Shift an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or a
manual transmission to Neutral.
Dinghy Towing
Dinghy Towing From the Front
4. Release the parking brake.
To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the following fuse from the floor
console fuse block: 8 (Ignition Switch, PASS‐Key® III+).
See Floor Console Fuse Block on page 6‑125 for more
information.
Remember to reinstall the fuse once the destination has
been reached.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing the vehicle.
The vehicle may be dinghy towed from the front with all
four wheels on the ground following these steps:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY to
unlock the steering wheel.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dinghy Towing From the Rear
Dolly Towing
The vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can be dinghy
towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced ground clearance.
Always tow your vehicle using the dinghy towing
procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission)
WARNING:
{
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later
in this section.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
Pulling A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
There are many different laws, including speed
.
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make
sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial
police.
The total weight on the vehicle's tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000 miles (1 600 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, transmission or other parts could be
damaged.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more information.
.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle's parts.
.
Do not tow when the outside air temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6 for
more information.
.
Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that
will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will
help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the
rear axle.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of
the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there
are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must
be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑25 for more information about the vehicle's
maximum load capacity.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 5‑25. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit
for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
If using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Does the trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they
are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
Driving with a Trailer
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for
the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by
itself.
.
Will there be any holes in the body of the vehicle
after installing a trailer hitch? If there are, then be
sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from exhaust can get into
the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35
Dirt and water can also enter the vehicle.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Backing Up
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers
are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving on Grades
Parking on Hills
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transmission
to cool.
WARNING:
{
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gauge. If the
indicator is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning
to reduce engine load. See Engine Overheating on
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
page 6‑34
.
When towing under severe conditions such as hot
ambient temperatures or steep grades, the vehicle may
experience more transmission shifting. A COOLING
MODE ON message may also appear in the DIC. This
alerts the driver that the shifting mode is in progress
and is aiding engine cooling. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑40 for more information.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
.
Start the engine.
on page 6‑34
.
.
Shift into a gear.
.
Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
(Manual Transmission)
Do not tow a trailer if the vehicle is equipped with a
manual transmission.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine
oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine) . . . . . . . . 6-25
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . 6-51
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps (Coupe) . . . . . 6-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo
Lamps (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare
Tire (SS Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . 6-111
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage . . . . . . 6-91
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
Tire (All Models Except SS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . 6-124
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance
and safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability
control. Some of these accessories could even
cause malfunction or damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑73.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
WARNING:
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/
or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
{
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑16.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑72.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7‑15.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect
the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and
can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑123.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be
found at www.toptiergas.com.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Octane
Gasoline Specifications
If the vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code 5),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than
87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to
as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑8 for additional
information.
California Fuel
If the vehicle has the 2.0L L4 engine (VIN Code X), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle's
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and a slight
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard. If the octane is less than 87, you
might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑27. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit‐related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We recommend that you use
these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
WARNING:
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine
when refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger side of the vehicle.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too
soon, it will spring back to the right.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑27.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
The CHECK GAS CAP message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly
installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40 for more information.
WARNING:
{
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
WARNING:
{
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑118.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4‑27
.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING:
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{
WARNING:
{
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
WARNING:
{
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with
this symbol on it.
It is located under
the instrument panel
on the driver's side
of the vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release lever to the left. It is
located under the front center of the hood toward
the driver's side of the vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, a gas strut
will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood
in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting
force of the strut is reduced, then release the hood
to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the process if necessary.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine, here is what you will see:
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on
page 6‑23 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine) on page 6‑25.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6‑127.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑42
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑42
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System
on page 6‑28
.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
.
D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑37 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 6‑27.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑36
.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on
page 6‑23 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine) on page 6‑25.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
C. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 6‑28
.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑37 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 6‑27.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6‑127.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑42
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑42
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System
on page 6‑28
.
.
.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑36
.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add
at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil.
This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 6‑131.
2.2L Engine
2.0L L4 Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
For Vehicles With the 2.2L L4 Engine
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4 Engine Only
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
.
GM4718M
This vehicle's engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® or
equivalent. Oils meeting this standard may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic
oils will meet this GM standard. Use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
This vehicle's engine was filled at the factory with a
synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this vehicle.
.
SAE 5W-30
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Temperature Operation
Engine Oil Life System
For Vehicles With the 2.2L L4 Engine
When to Change Engine Oil
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computer
system that indicates when to change the engine oil
and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and
engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on
driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life
system to work properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40. Change
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an
oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) at the same time to
enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑46.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must
be changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes until the
DIC display shows OIL‐LIFE RESET.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell
you the system has been reset.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system
so it can calculate when the next oil change is required.
If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset
the system.
5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.0L Turbo Engine)
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
Engine Compartment Overview for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 Scheduled Maintenance
for more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
1. Turn off the engine.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
3. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not remove the clamps.
WARNING:
{
4. Remove the air outlet duct.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter.
5. To remove the filter cover, unlatch the clamps, then
pull up on the front and pull out.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine)
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
6. Remove filter and inspect or replace.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct for
cracks, cuts, and deterioration. The air outlet
duct must be replaced if damaged.
7. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
8. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws
on the clamps that hold the duct in place.
9. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
WARNING:
{
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
To inspect or replace the filter, remove the screws that
hold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be sure to
reinstall the cover tightly.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to a dealer/
retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission
fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason
for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a
dealer/retailer for service. Have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have the fluid level checked
by your dealer/retailer when the oil is changed. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11
for the proper fluid to use.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3. Be sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11
.
Hydraulic Clutch
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
See Brakes on page 6‑37 for more information.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.0L L4 Engine similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant
WARNING:
{
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how
to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑34
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
What to Use
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
WARNING:
{
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11 for more information.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing
else needs to be added. This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak in the cooling system.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the driver's side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on location.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about two or two and one-half
turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
This will allow any pressure still left to be vented
out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the COLD FILL line on the tank. Wait about
five minutes, then check to see if the level is below
the COLD FILL line. If the level is below the line,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to the
line. Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the COLD FILL line for at least
five minutes.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can feel
the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out
for the engine cooling fan.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower
than the COLD FILL line, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the COLD FILL line.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle serviced.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find an engine coolant temperature warning
light on your vehicle's instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 4‑26 for
more information.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no
steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when the vehicle:
WARNING:
{
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) for
automatic transmission or NEUTRAL for manual
transmission , while stopped. If it is safe to do so,
pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and
let the engine idle.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in
the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
reservoir location.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Notice:
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.
.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. Adding fluid does
not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the brake
linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid,
as necessary, only when work is done on the brake/
clutch hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder and, on manual
transmission vehicles, the
clutch hydraulic system
use the same reservoir
filled with DOT 3 brake
fluid.
WARNING:
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake and/or clutch hydraulic
system.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the reservoir.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑23.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down because of
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake and/or clutch hydraulic
system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the
brake and/or clutch hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later the brakes and/or
clutch will not work well.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
brake or clutch hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few drops of
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11
.
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil,
in the brake or clutch hydraulic system
can damage brake or clutch hydraulic
system parts so badly that they will have
to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
WARNING:
{
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch might not
work well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
page 6‑118
.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,
except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑131.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not
have wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing
noise is heard, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation
or changing. When the front brake pads are replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
WARNING:
{
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Pedal Travel
Replacing Brake System Parts
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
Brake Adjustment
Every moderate brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for
wear. If rarely making moderate or heavier brake stops,
the brakes might not adjust correctly. Very carefully
making a few moderate brake stops about every
1,000 miles (1 600 km) will adjust the brakes properly.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes and the brake pedal
goes down farther than normal, the rear drum brakes
might need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and
firmly applying the brakes a few times.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed.
WARNING:
{
The battery is in the trunk. Access to the battery is not
necessary to jump start the vehicle. See Jump Starting
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑42
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
on page 6‑42
.
DANGER:
{
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle's battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
the vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
WARNING:
{
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would not
be able to start the vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
They contain acid that can burn you.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
Locate the remote
positive (+) terminal
which is located under
a red tethered cap on
the engine compartment
fuse block. Lift the cap to
access the terminal.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located in the trunk. You will not
need to access your battery for jump starting.
The vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a
remote negative (−) jump starting terminal.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locate the remote
negative (−) ground
terminal, marked GND (−),
which is located behind
the engine coolant
surge tank.
WARNING:
{
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don't,
explosive gas could be present.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on the location of the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on
the vehicle.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
WARNING:
{
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
WARNING:
{
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will
go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will
go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the jumper cables
in the correct order, making sure that the cables
do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original
position.
Headlamp Aiming
The optical headlamp aiming system has been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment
However, If the vehicle is damaged, the headlamp aim
may be affected and adjustment may be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
Jumper Cable Removal
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to
be re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should be:
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps:
.
Placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑13.
light colored wall.
.
On a perfectly level surface which is level all the
way to the wall.
.
Placed so it is at a right angle to the wall.
.
Clear of any snow, ice, or mud on it.
.
Fully assembled, with the tires properly inflated,
and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming
is being done.
.
Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel, with the
spare tire in the proper location, and one person or
160 lbs (75 kg) on the driver seat.
2. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle's low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
on the low‐beam headlamp.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. At the wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 2 and mark it.
4. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in
Step 3.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
socket wrench.
5. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard in front of the headlamp not
being adjusted. Do not place it directly on the
headlamp. This allows only the beam of light from
the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat
surface.
7. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑55.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING:
{
8. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the
correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B)
shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the opposite
headlamp.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs:
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑13.
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker
C. Headlamp
2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the two fasteners from the fascia.
Assistance may be needed for Steps 4 and 5.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the front fascia back.
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
5. Pull the headlamp assembly up at an angle and
towards the radiator to remove it.
To replace a CHMSL bulb:
6. Disconnect the bulb base from the wiring harness
by lifting the locking tab.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Press the tabs to release the bulb assembly.
7. Disconnect the wiring harness from the bulb
socket.
8. Remove the retainer by turning it counterclockwise.
9. Turn the bulb socket for the headlamp, front turn
signal, or parking lamp counterclockwise. For the
sidemarker bulb, use a tool to assist in turning the
bulb socket.
10. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
11. Install a new bulb.
12. Reinstall the bulb assembly by reversing Steps 1
through 9.
When reinstalling the headlamp assembly, first
make sure that the wiring harness is in its original
position. If not, the headlamp assembly will not fit
correctly.
Align the two tabs on the bottom of the assembly
that fit into two slots in the headlamp assembly
bracket.
3. Pull the bulb assembly down to access the bulbs.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
5. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the taillamp assembly.
6. Align the tabs in the bulb assembly with the
assembly in the trunk lid. Push the bulb assembly
back into place until it snaps in. You may need to
use a tool to guide the tabs into the assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket
until it clicks.
Taillamps and Turn Signal
Lamps (Coupe)
7. Push the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
8. Push the wiring harness straight into the bulb
socket and push down on the tab.
9. Reinstall the trunk trim and fastener.
To replace this bulb:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim and pull back fastener.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps (Sedan)
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim and pull back fastener.
3. Remove the additional fastener.
4. Remove the outer two screws from the taillamp
assembly.
5. Lift up on the tab and pull the wiring harness
straight out.
6. Remove the taillamp assembly from the quarter
panel.
A. Sidemarker
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out.
8. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.
9. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Push the new bulb into the taillamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
11. Reinstall the taillamp assembly into the quarter
panel.
12. Push the wiring harness straight into the taillamp
assembly and push the tab down.
13. Reinstall the outer two screws into the taillamp
assembly.
14. Reinstall the trunk trim and the fasteners.
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe)
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
out of the lamp assembly.
On vehicles that have a back-up lamp cover, first
remove it by pressing the tab at the top.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
5. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket
until it clicks.
To replace a back-up lamp bulb:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
6. Push the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
2. Locate the back-up lamp bulb assembly in the
trunk lid.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Install the new bulb.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
5. Push the bulb straight into the socket and turn
clockwise to reinstall.
6. Push and turn the license plate lamp away from
you through the opening.
7. Reinstall the two screws holding the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Back-Up Lamps
Bulb Number
921
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
912
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
3157KX
9007 LL
Halogen Headlamps,
High/Low-Beam
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the
license plate lamps.
License Plate Lamp and
Sidemarker
194
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp toward you
through the opening.
Stoplamp, Taillamp and
Turn Signal Lamps
3057KX
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7‑13
.
Here is how to remove the wiper blades:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper
assembly toward the driver side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
WARNING: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about the tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see the vehicle warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the
tire manufacturer.
.
Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle's
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
WARNING:
{
Pressure on page 6‑66
.
.
.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
.
Overloading your vehicle's tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle's tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Vehicle on page 5‑25
.
(Continued)
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
Winter Tires
If the vehicle has 225/40R18 size tires, they
are classified as low‐profile performance tires.
These tires are designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement. You may
also notice more road noise with low‐profile
performance tires and that they tend to wear
faster.
If the vehicle has 225/40R18 size tires, they are
classified as performance tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry
pavement. If you expect to drive on snow or ice
covered roads often, you may want to get winter tires
for the vehicle. All season tires provide good overall
performance on most surfaces but they may not
offer the traction you would like or the same level
of performance as winter tires on snow or ice
covered roads.
The 225/40R18 tire is a high performance
tire designed for dry traction and handling
performance which may result in reduced tread
life of 15,000 miles (24 140 km) or less depending
on individual driving behavior.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in
vehicle handling and braking.
Notice: If the vehicle has low‐profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
New Tires on page 6‑76.
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you choose to use winter tires:
.
Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
.
Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and
ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed the tire's maximum
speed capability.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines. If your vehicle has
205/55R16 size tires, they meet the GM TPC
Spec rating, but the TPC Spec code has not
been molded onto the tire's sidewall.
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more information
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑78
.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone
flat. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑114 and
page 6‑66
.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 6‑82
.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. A tire
size without the letter P as the first character is
certified to European standards.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
page 6‑66
.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25
.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25
.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑25
.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑66
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25
.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑78
.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which
a tire can operate.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑25
.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑75
.
Vehicle on page 5‑25
.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under‐inflation or over‐inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under‐inflation), you can get the following:
.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25 . How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
you can get the following:
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
For additional information regarding the compact
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 6‑114
.
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even
when they are under‐inflated. Check the tire's
inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
The vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). This system uses radio and sensor technology
to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has
this feature, TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly, if the vehicle has one. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑68 for
additional information.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25, for an
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑66.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑38 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40.
Your vehicle's TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑73 and Tires on page 6‑57.
Notice: Using non‐approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always use the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer/retailer.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved
liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants
could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑84 for information regarding
the inflator kit materials and instructions.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires when they are
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑76
.
.
One of the road tires has been replaced with
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
the spare tire, if the vehicle has one. The spare
tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC message should go
off once you re‐install the road tire containing
the TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service
if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes
on and stays on.
.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles
with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
1. Set the parking brake.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle's tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations,
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter's lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating
the TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's air
pressure. When increasing the tire's pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire's sidewall. To decrease the tire's air-pressure use
the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gauge, or a key.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner's sensor is ready to be learned.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire's valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process
stops and you need to start over.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles
without Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
1. Set the parking brake.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), press
the INFO and Set/Reset buttons at the same time
for about one second. Then press and release the
INFO button until the TIRE LEARN? message
displays.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
4. Press and hold the Set/Reset DIC button for
approximately three seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice to indicate the
TPMS receiver is ready and the TIRE LEARN ON
message displays. The driver side front turn signal
also comes on to indicate that corner sensor is
ready to be learned.
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS
learn mode, or if communication with the receiver
stops, or if the time limit has expired, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over
beginning with Step 2.
5. Start with the driver side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire's valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect the
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, for signs of wear or damage.
SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 6‑75
for more information.
8. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
9. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 6.
on page 7‑3
.
If this vehicle has P225/40R18 size tires, they
should be rotated every 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
10. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound
to indicate the tire learning process is done.
The LEARN COMPLETE message displays
if all four tire positions are learned. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS
learn mode, or if communication with the receiver
stops, or if the time limit has expired, the TIRE
LEARN? message displays on the DIC. Turn
the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over
beginning with Step 2.
SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 6‑75
and Wheel Replacement on page 6‑80
.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), reset the TPMS sensors after
rotating the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 6‑68
.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑131
.
WARNING:
{
When rotating the vehicle's tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt
from places where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use
a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Do not include the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑66 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑25
.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑92
.
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
tread remaining.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like it
did when the tires were new. Replacing less
than a full set of tires can affect the braking
and handling performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑73
for information on proper tire rotation.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you
need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends
that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.
WARNING:
{
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread design, the TPC
Spec number will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 6‑59 for additional information.
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes, brands, or types
may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the correct size, brand, and
type of tires on all wheels. It is all right to
drive with your compact spare temporarily,
as it was developed for use on your vehicle.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑114
.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low‐pressure
warning if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low‐pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
WARNING:
{
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
System on page 6‑67
.
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25 , for
more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias‐belted tires)
as your vehicle's original tires.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover . Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
WARNING:
{
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑76 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑4 for additional
information.
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal
Safety Requirements In Addition To These
Grades.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments
to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side
or the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on
a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to
be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑92 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P195/65R15, P205/55R16, P205/50R17 or 225/40R18
size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class S‐type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast
or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.
Tire Chains
WARNING:
{
If your vehicle has P195/65R15, P205/55R16,
P205/50R17, or 225/40R18 size tires, do not
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and
you or others may be injured in a crash.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain the tires properly. See Tires
on page 6‑57. If air goes out of a tire, It is much more
likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and
what to do:
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination, and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle's wheels.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under
control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
WARNING:
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it
for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
2. Park the vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and
spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑92
.
To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6‑84.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen
or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed
area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store
a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an
under inflated tire.
WARNING:
{
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed the
recommended pressure.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire
is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The kit includes:
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister
C. Power Plug
E. Pressure Gauge
F. Air Only Hose (Black)
G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
D. On/Off Button
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6‑82. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit
from its storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 6‑91.
Make sure the on/off button (D) is in the
off (O) position.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) and the power
plug (C).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit
during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated
environment for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate
the tire faster.
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4‑12.
9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gauge (E).
The recommended inflation pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑66.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do
not use the cigarette lighter.
The pressure gauge (E) may read higher than
the actual tire pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate
pressure reading. The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure is reached.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug
from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the
inflating hose from the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
8. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gauge (E) will initially show a
high pressure while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly
drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates
with air only.
10. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak
air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 11 through
17 must be done immediately after Step 10.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
18. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
12. Turn the sealant/air hose (G) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal
the tire. See Roadside Assistance Program on
13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the sealant/air hose (G), and the power
plug (C) back in their original location.
15. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label
from the sealant
page 8‑7
.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
canister (B) and place
it in a highly visible
location.
19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or
vehicle.
20. Dispose of the used sealant canister (B) and
sealant/air hose (G) assembly at a local dealer/
retailer or in accordance with local state codes
and practices.
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired or
replaced.
21. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
22. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire
sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer/retailer within a 100 miles
(161 km) of driving to have the tire repaired or
replaced.
16. Return the equipment to its original storage
location in the vehicle.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
4. Remove the power plug (C) from the air
compressor (A).
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
5. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
6. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stem
and press the lever down to secure it.
8. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4‑12.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do
not use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6‑82
.
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit
from its storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 6‑91.
10. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the
compressor on.
2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gauge (E).
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
The recommended inflation pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑66.
To remove the sealant canister:
The pressure gauge (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off
until the correct pressure is reached.
12. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
13. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
14. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
15. Replace the air only hose (F) and the power
plug (C) back in its original location.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
16. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) from the
compressor (A).
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install a new sealant canister:
1. Align the sealant/air hose (G) with the slot in the air
compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister (B) down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G) around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose (F) onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the
trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so the inflator filling
hose is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
2. Lift the trunk liner.
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission to
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
3. Remove the retainer that holds the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
4. Remove the kit from the foam container.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse
the steps.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
Base Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire and
tools.
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
E. Jack and Wheel Wrench
F. Bolt
6-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the retainer (B) that holds down the spare
tire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑114 for
more information.
Uplevel Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
4. Remove the spare tire (C) by gently pulling it up
and out of the trunk.
5. Remove the wing nut (D) that holds the jack and
remove the jack and wheel wrench (E).
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire and
tools.
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Retainer
B. Jack and Wheel Wrench
C. Spare Tire
D. Foam Support
E. Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (A) that holds down the jack,
wheel wrench (B) and spare tire (C).
4. Remove the spare tire by gently pulling it up and
out of the trunk.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and
wheel wrench (B).
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will need to turn the plastic wheel nut
counterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench
from the jack.
Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel
wrench to extend the handle.
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it
comes off.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
(All Models Except SS)
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑92.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
2. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps do not come off.
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
WARNING:
{
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
5. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) behind the front wheel opening.
The rear location is about 4 inches (10 cm) in front
of the rear wheel opening.
6. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle's frame, where the notch is located,
nearest the flat tire.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
7. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove all of the
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
wheel nuts and flat tire.
and spare wheel.
11. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
page 6‑92
.
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become
loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be
tightened with a torque wrench to the proper
torque specification after replacing. Follow the
torque specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑131 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
4-Wheel Nuts
5-Wheel Nuts
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten
the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑131 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire (SS Model)
The SS Model has larger performance brakes than the
base model. The compact spare tire will not clear the
front brakes.
Do not use the compact spare tire in the event of a front
flat tire.
You must use the rear tire to replace the front flat tire.
To change the rear road tire:
Rear Tire Changing Procedure
1. Do a safety check before proceeding.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑92
for more information.
2. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps do not come off.
6-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the rear wheel cover until
it comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the rear wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
5. Position the jack lift head at the rear jack location
nearest the rear tire. The rear location is about
4 inches (10 cm) in front of the rear wheel opening.
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle's frame, where the notch is located,
nearest the flat tire.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
7. Put the compact spare tire near the rear tire.
9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
WARNING:
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
WARNING:
{
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
6-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
WARNING:
{
and spare wheel.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
page 6‑92
.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
10. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
WARNING:
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
6-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
WARNING:
{
sequence, as shown.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become
loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be
tightened with a torque wrench to the proper
torque specification after replacing. Follow the
torque specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking
wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑131 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
5-Wheel Nuts
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten
the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑131 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
6-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the front flat tire:
Front Flat Tire Changing Procedure:
1. Perform a rear tire change by removing the rear
tire and installing the compact spare tire in the rear
wheel location. The rear road tire will be used to
replace the front flat tire. See Rear Tire Changing
Procedure in this section.
2. Do a safety check before proceeding.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑92.
3. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps do not come off.
6-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it
comes off.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
7. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle's frame, where the notch is located,
nearest the flat tire.
5. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts
on the flat tire. Do not remove them yet.
8. Put the tire near the flat tire.
WARNING:
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
6. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) behind the front wheel opening.
6-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
WARNING:
{
and spare wheel.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
WARNING:
{
10. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑92
.
6-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Place the tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become
loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be
tightened with a torque wrench to the proper
torque specification after replacing. Follow the
torque specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑131 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
13. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten
the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑131 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
6-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
sequence, as shown.
WARNING:
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
5-Wheel Nuts
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
6-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Jack and Wheel Wrench
D. Stow Bolt Extension Rod
E. Flat Tire
F. Bolt
Base Model
6-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Jack and Wheel Wrench
D. Stow Bolt Extension Rod
E. Flat Tire
F. Foam Support
G. Bolt
To store a flat tire and tools:
1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod and sleeve
from the jack.
2. Screw the stow bolt extension rod and the sleeve
into the existing spare tire hold-down bolt.
3. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, first remove
the center cap with your hand or the wheel wrench.
4. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tire tub.
5. Re-attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
6. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire, being
careful not to scratch the inside of the wheel.
7. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow bolt
extension rod. Secure the jack and road wheel
using the larger plastic retainer.
8. If used in the vehicle, place the smaller jack
retainer nut in a safe place until you are ready to
store the compact spare tire in the trunk again.
Uplevel Model
6-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the compact spare tire and tools, follow
the previous procedure without using the stow bolt
extension rod and see Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools on page 6‑93 and follow the removal procedure,
in reverse, for the proper jack storage instructions for
this vehicle.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, if the
vehicle has one, stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced at your convenience. Of course, it
is best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon
as possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in
good shape in case it is needed again.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon
as possible.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire
WARNING:
{
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare
tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains
on the compact spare.
This vehicle may have a compact spare tire.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
6-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove
particles from the upholstery. It is important to keep
the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily
soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
The vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
6-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
Fabric/Carpet
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
from any interior surface.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
6-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they
can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
6-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
WARNING:
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11
.
6-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑118
.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
6-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because they could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed
after driving on roads that have been sprayed
with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride.
These chlorides are used on roads for conditions
such as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's
chrome with soap and water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
6-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this.
6-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Vehicle Identification
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑131
for the vehicle's engine code.
6-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑72 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, on the driver side near the spare
tire cover, has the following information:
.
page 2‑73
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
Headlamp Wiring
.
Paint information
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should the
headlamps fail to function, have the headlamp system
checked right away.
.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage the
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
6-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Floor Console Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has
the same amperage. Just pick some feature of the
vehicle that you can get along without — like the
radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse if it is the
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in the vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment
fuse block.
There is one additional fuse located in the back of the
vehicle near the battery.
The floor console fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the floor console behind the forward
panel. The panel has three clips. Pull the panel to
disconnect the three clips, and access the fuses.
Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.
6-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fuse Puller
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Amplifier
Cluster
Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+
Stoplamp
Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning,
PASS-Key® III+
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Empty
Spare
Airbag
Spare
Windshield Wiper
Climate Control System, Ignition
Window Retained Accessory Power
Empty
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
19
20
Sunroof
6-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuses
21
Usage
Spare
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the vehicle. Lift off the cover to check
the fuses. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6‑14 for more information on location.
22
Empty
23
Audio System
24
XM Radio™, OnStar™
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
25
26
27
28
29
Door Locks
Interior Lights
Steering Wheel Control Illumination
Power Windows
Relays
30
Usage
Climate Control System
Empty
31
32
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
6-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
SPARES
Usage
Spares
ABS
Antilock Brake System
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
REAR DEFOG
COOL FAN2
CRNK
Rear Defogger
Engine Cooling Fan High Speed
Starter
COOL FAN 1
BCM3
Engine Cooling Fan Low Speed
Body Control Module 3
Body Control Module 2
Fog Lamps
BCM2
FOG LAMP
HORN
Horn
RT HI BEAM
Passenger Side High Beam Lamp
6-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
LT HI BEAM
RT LO BEAM
LT LO BEAM
DRL
Usage
Driver Side High Beam Lamp
Passenger Side Low Beam Lamp
Driver Side Low Beam Lamp
Daytime Running Lamps
Fuel Pump
Fuses
A/C CLTCH
CHMSL
Usage
Air Conditioning Clutch
Center High Mount Stop Lamp
Antilock Brake System 2
Blank
ABS2
Blank
FUEL PUMP
EXH
ECM/TRANS
BCK UP
Engine Control Module, Transmission
Back-Up Lamps
Exhaust Emissions
Engine Valve Solenoid
Injectors
ENG VLV SOL
INJ
TRUNK/ HTD
SEATS
Trunk, Heated Seats
Blank
Blank
AIR SOL
Blank
AIR Solenoid
Blank
Blank
Blank
SDM
Sensing Diagnostic Module (Airbags)
Antilock Brake System 3
Auxiliary Power Outlet
Mirrors
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
Control Module
PCM/ECM
ABS3
EPS
Electric Power Steering
AIR Pump
OUTLET
MIR
AIR PUMP
PRK LAMP
WPR
Parking Lamps
Windshield Wiper
Ignition
DLC
Data Link Connector
Canister Vent
CNSTR VENT
IP IGN
6-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Relays
WPR ON/OFF
COOL FAN 1
PWR/TRN
Usage
Windshield Wiper On/Off
Engine Cooling Fan 1
Powertrain
REAR DEFOG
Rear Defogger
AIR SOL
(TURBO:
COOL FAN 2)
AIR Solenoid (L61)/Engine Cooling
Fan 2 (LNF)
AIR PUMP
A/C CLTCH
CHMSL
AIR Pump
WPR HI/LO
CRNK
Windshield Wiper High/Low Speed
Starter
Air Conditioning Clutch
Center High Mount Stop Lamp
Run, Crank
COOL FAN 2
(TURBO:
COOL FANS)
Engine Cooling Fan (L61, LE5)/
Engine Cooling Fans (LNF)
RUN/CRNK
Misc.
Usage
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
PLR
Fuse Puller
6-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
2.0L L4 Engine
8.7 L
7.0 L
9.2 qt
7.4 qt
2.2L L4 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L L4 Engine
4.7 L
4.7 L
5.0 qt
5.0 qt
2.2L L4 Engine
Fuel Tank
2.0L L4 Engine
50.0 L
51.1 L
49.2 L
13.2 gal
13.5 gal
13.0 gal
2.2L L4 Engine (with NU6 emissions)
2.2L L4 Engine (without NU6 emissions)
6-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)
6.6 L
1.9 L
7.0 qt
2.0 qt
Manual Transmission, 2.0L L4 Engine
(Complete Drain and Refill)
Manual Transmission, 2.2L L4 Engine
(Complete Drain and Refill)
1.6 L
1.7 qt
Wheel Nut Torque
140 Y
100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
2.0L L4 Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
X
Manual
0.89 mm (0.035 in)
Automatic
Manual
2.2L L4 Engine
5
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
6-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
Maintenance Schedule
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25.
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑7
.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
WARNING:
{
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑5.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need more
frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the
vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be
certain that you will receive the highest level of service
available. Your dealer/retailer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine GM replacement
parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑13. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and the oil life system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system. If the engine oil life
system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within
5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 6‑21.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑73.
When the Change Oil Soon message displays,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
The services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be
Scheduled Maintenance
performed when:
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time
When the Change Oil Soon Message
Displays
the engine oil was changed.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑17. An Emission Control Service.
Change Oil Soon message has displayed or
since the last service.
When the Change Oil Soon message displays, service
is required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within
the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate
the need for vehicle service for more than a year. The
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
.
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
page 6‑17. An Emission Control Service.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
on page 6‑29
.
signs of wear.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑36.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
.
on page 6‑66
.
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and
wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑120
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑73.
.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement.
page 6‑73
.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 6‑56
.
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, and
trunk lid hinges and latches lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11. More frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on page 6‑23 or Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine) on page 6‑25.
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑74.
Once a Year
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on page 6‑23
or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine) on
Services on page 7‑8.
.
.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑8.
page 6‑25
.
.
Passenger compartment air filter replacement
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
More frequent replacement may be required if
vehicle is driven regularly under dusty conditions.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑8
.
.
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑8.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑17
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑29
.
page 6‑28
.
.
.
.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Throttle system inspection for interference, binding
or for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑36.
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑66
accelerator or cruise control cables.
.
.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit, check the sealant expiration date printed on
the instruction label of the kit. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑84.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑73.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
.
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
Spark plug replacement. An Emission Control
Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Engine air cleaner filter replacement.
.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine)
on page 6‑23 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine) on page 6‑25.
Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑29. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service only) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑27.
.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
Rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Steering and suspension inspection.
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
Restraint system components check.
Passenger compartment air filter replacement.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the starter works in any
other position, your vehicle needs service.
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down
halfway, and try to start the engine. The starter
should work only when the clutch pedal is pushed
down all the way to the floor. If the starter works
when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way
down, your vehicle needs service.
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.
For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition
WARNING:
{
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever
is in P (Park). The ignition key should come out
only in LOCK/OFF.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
.
For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑31
.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
.
To check the parking brake's holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
.
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
System
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑29
.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Hydraulic Brake
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Hydraulic Clutch
System
Engine Oil
(2.2L L4 engine)
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
on page 6‑17
.
Chassis Lubricant
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified with the American
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC‐LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
Manual
Transmission
(2.2L L4 engine)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Engine Oil
(2.0L L4 engine) However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
see Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
Manual
Manual Transmission Fluid
Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 88862472,
(2.0L L4 engine) in Canada 88862473).
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Manual
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Transmission in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Shift Linkage
Hood and
Door Hinges
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.0L L4 Engine
15909459
22731072
12605566
52493319
A3099C
A3054C
PF457G
CF125
2.2L L4 Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
2.0L L4 Engine
12620540
12625058
41-108
41-103
2.2L L4 Engine
Wiper Blades
Driver Side — 22 in (56 cm)
Passenger Side — 17 in (43 cm)
15243233
15243232
—
—
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
Dotted line shows routing for vehicles without air
conditioning.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . 8-16
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . 8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer's sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or
the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada
Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner
disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the
facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
.
and more
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
.
service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding
the vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links:
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at
its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the
U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
Roadside Assistance Program
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA
(1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1‐888‐889‐2438).
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too
often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
Services Provided
number
.
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
Telephone number of your location
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
vehicle
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change
a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility
for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 km from where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how
to receive payment.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
.
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
Legal fines.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic
route. There is a limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can
be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the
problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your
dealership/retailer, let them know this, and ask for
instructions.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM
helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing
several transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the
following:
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation Program
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination
with minimal interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance parameters of
the dealer's area.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not
be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement
will be limited and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a
rental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
.
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a
copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a
report may not be necessary. This is especially
true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are
driveable.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7 for more information.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
If another party's insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Service Bulletins
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store
data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature
settings.
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Frequency
Radio Frequency Statement
Identification (RFID)
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antenna
A
Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . 4-86
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-123
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-119
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-119
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-117
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-115
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-117
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Adjustments
Headlamp Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-25
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62, 2-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
i - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Automatic Transmission
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Back-Up Lamps - Ambulance Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . 6-51
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
B
Back-Up Lamps - Ambulance Body
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Brake
and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
i - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in a
C
California
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
Child Restraints
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-119
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-119
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-117
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-115
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-117
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
i - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Competitive Driving, Racing or Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Coolant
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Display
Reconfigurable Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Door
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Engine Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Driver
Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
DIC Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-16
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
i - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-25
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Active Light . . . . . 5-12
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
E
Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-127
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-125
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-125
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . .6-124
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
i - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
F
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-127
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-125
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-125
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-25
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Fog Lamps
G
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauges
Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
i - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Indicator/Warning LIghts
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Instrument Panel
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System (ITBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33, 5-39
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Wiper Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Hood
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
i - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights (cont.)
L
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Locks
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Lumbar
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Lamps
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Mirror Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Taillamps and Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Lighting
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Active . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
i - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
N
Maintenance Schedule
Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Manual Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Mirror Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Mirrors
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Outside Manual Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Outside Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outlets
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Outside
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Manual Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
i - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
P
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Parking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62, 2-67
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-5
Phone
R
Racing or Other Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Radios
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Range Adjustment, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Reconfigurable Performance Display (RPD) . . . . . . . 4-33
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
i - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98, 6-102
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Restraint System Check
S
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Securing a Child Restraint
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
i - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-6
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Shifting
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . 6-91
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
T
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Spare Tire
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . 6-53
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-98, 6-102
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
i - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33, 5-39
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Traction System
Enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Transmission Operation, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-98, 6-102
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-98, 6-102
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84, 6-91
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
i - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheels
V
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Windshield
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Parking Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Wiper Activated Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-123
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Vehicle Personalization
DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
W
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Warnings
X
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
i - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|